JP6652109B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine has a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device. The game is fired toward the game area in accordance with the shooting operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Also, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration having an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as dish storage sections is known, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper dish storage section are used to launch game balls The game balls guided by the device and surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

JP 2009-261415 A

  Here, in the gaming machines such as those described above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately managing the gaming machine.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1 includes a setting unit that sets a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage,
History storage executing means for storing, in a history storage means, history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event occurring when a game is executed,
Equipped with a,
The history storage unit includes a first history storage unit and a second history storage unit,
The history storage execution means,
Means for storing, on the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means, which is set as a storage object, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event,
After the setting of the set value to be used by the setting unit is performed, the predetermined history information is set on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is not set as the storage target. Means for storing the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means until the predetermined event has occurred,
With
This gaming machine is
After the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit is performed, the predetermined history information is stored on a side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is not set as the storage target. Means for changing the storage object between the first history storage means and the second history storage means when the specific amount or more is stored;
After the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit is performed, the predetermined history information is stored on a side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is not set as the storage target. A means for erasing the history information on the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means which has been set as the storage target up to the specified amount,
Characterized in that it comprises a.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to manage a gaming machine suitably.

It is a perspective view showing the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing a main configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the composition of a game board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure regarding discharge | emission of the game ball which flowed down the game area. It is a front view of a main control device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of various counters used for a success / failure lottery. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in a main ROM. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting value update process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control processing performed by a main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation | variation start process performed by a main side CPU. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration in which a detection result of a ball-input detection sensor is input to a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the incoming ball detection process performed by the main side CPU. It is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration of a payout control device and various devices that communicate with the payout control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by a payout side CPU. FIG. 2 is a block diagram for describing an electrical configuration of a management IC. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of an input port of a management-side I / F. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of a correspondence memory. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of a history memory. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a recognition process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a management process executed by the management CPU. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the information of the correspondence of the 1st-15th buffer and the kind of signal is stored in the memory for correspondence. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a management output process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a history setting process executed by the management CPU. 6A to 6E are time charts showing how history information is stored in a history memory. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a process of outputting a set value update signal executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a display output process executed by the management CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a display process executed by the management CPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the process for data output performed by a main side CPU, and (b) is a flowchart which shows the process for external output performed by a management side CPU. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for describing various tables stored in a main ROM according to the second embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the memory for another storage in a 3rd embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a repetitive change monitoring process executed by a management CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the monitoring process of the repetition change performed by the main CPU in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting update recognition performed by the management side CPU in 5th Embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the memory for the history in a 6th embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a history setting process executed by the management CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the history memory in a 7th embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the memory for history in an 8th embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a history setting process executed by the management CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a display output process executed by the management CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the input port of the management side I / F in a ninth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a recognition process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a management process executed by the management CPU. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the information of the correspondence of the 1st-12th buffer and the kind of signal is stored in the memory for correspondence. It is a block diagram for explaining composition of a signal course which transmits a detection result of each ball detection sensor in a 10th embodiment to a main side CPU and management IC.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as a “pachinko machine”) that is a kind of gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing a main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. 2, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the game area PA is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 forward. Have. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting a wooden plate to four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to island facilities. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration, but may be a configuration in which the outer frame 11 is provided in an island facility of a game hall.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. More specifically, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation end side when viewed from the front.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13. The front door frame 14 is rotatable forward with the left side being a rotation base end side and the right side being a rotation tip side in a front view. A back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation front end side in front view.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the tip end of its rotation, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11. The door frame 14 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 so that the door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on a cylinder lock 17 provided to be exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and a game area PA formed on the front face of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

  An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of an outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 provide guidance means. As a guide rail. A game ball fired from a game ball firing mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to an upper portion of the game area PA by a guide rail.

  Incidentally, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeder 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper plate 55a to be described later onto the launch rail 27a, and a launch rail 27a. And a solenoid 27c which is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. When the firing operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the drive of the solenoid 27c is controlled, and a game ball is fired.

  The game board 24 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, and the like. ing. A total of four general winning ports 31 are provided, and one each other is provided.

  Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when balls enter the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. More specifically, the number of prize balls is determined when one game ball enters the first operation port 33 or when one game ball enters the second operation port 34. In the case where one prize ball is paid out and one game ball enters the general winning opening 31, 10 prize balls are paid out and the special electric prize winning device 32 is executed. When one of the game balls enters, the payout of 15 prize balls is executed.

  The number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the second operation port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34 may have the first operation port. The number of award balls may be larger than 33.

  In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. In addition, a large number of nails 24b are planted on the game board 24 for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are provided.

  Here, entering the ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not limited to the mode of being discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the through gate 35 are distinguished from each other in order to clearly distinguish game balls from entering the out opening 24a. Entering a game ball into is also referred to as winning.

  The first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 are unitized as operation port devices and installed on the game board 24. The first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 are both open upward. The two working ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction such that the first working port 33 faces upward. The second operating port 34 is provided with a general electric part 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The game ball cannot enter the second operation port 34 in the closed state of the general electric role object 34a, and the prize in the second operation port 34 becomes possible when the general electric role object 34a is opened.

  A through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second operation port 34 in the downflow direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and a game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second operating port 34.

  On the basis of the winning in the through gate 35, the general-purpose part 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with a winning in the through gate 35 as a trigger, and a general-purpose display of a general-purpose unit 38 provided in a lower right corner which is an area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. The display of the pattern is changed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electrification opening winning and the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed and the variable display on the ordinary figure display section 38a is ended, the state shifts to the ordinary electricity opening state. In the normal-power open state, the general-purpose part 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

  In addition, the general-purpose display unit 38a is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited thereto, and is not limited to a liquid crystal display device and an organic EL display device. , CRT, or other types of display devices such as a dot matrix display. Further, as the pattern variably displayed on the ordinary figure display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed may be considered.

  In the general-purpose unit 38, a general-purpose display display 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the general-purpose display 38a. The number of awarded game balls to the through gate 35 is retained up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the general-purpose reservation display section 38b.

  A lottery is performed with a winning in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. The lottery result is clearly shown through the display effects on the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

  More specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a. The display area of the special figure display section 37a is smaller than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display unit 37a, a change in the pattern or a predetermined display is performed by performing a lottery with a winning in the first operating port 33 or a winning in the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, the special figure display unit 37a is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined mode, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , CRT, or other types of display devices such as a dot matrix display. Further, as a pattern displayed on the special figure display section 37a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors May be displayed.

  In the special figure unit 37, a special figure reservation display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The number of game balls winning in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 is retained up to a maximum of four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the special figure reservation display section 37b.

  More specifically, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and may be a dot matrix display device. You may.

  In the symbol display device 41, when a variable display or a predetermined display of a pattern is performed on the special figure display unit 37a based on a winning in the first operating port 33 or a winning in the second operating port 34, the symbol is displayed in accordance with the display. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. For example, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol columns of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas, and a main number with “1” to “9” in each symbol row. The symbols are scrolled and displayed in an ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, first, scroll display in all the symbol rows is started, and the display is switched from the scroll display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row → the lower symbol row → the middle symbol row. The process is terminated in a state where the symbol is statically displayed. Then, in the game time in which the game result is a jackpot result, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on an active line set in advance on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the same odd symbol combination is stopped and displayed when the most advantageous big hit result to be described later is obtained, and the same even symbol combination is stopped and displayed when the low-probability big hit result to be described later. When the winning combination is a low winning winning probability big hit result, the combination of the symbols which is not the same symbol combination but is not stopped and displayed when the result is not the low winning winning high probability big hit result is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, in the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by winning in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, but also the display effect in the opening / closing execution mode to which the process shifts after winning is performed. Will be In addition, based on the winning of one of the operating ports 33, 34, the display is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, and a predetermined result is displayed and ended until one game is played. Equivalent to times. In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described symbol, and for example, a configuration in which only numbers are variably displayed as the symbol may be employed.

  If a win is won by a lottery based on a prize in the first operating port 33 or a prize in the second operating port 34, the mode is shifted to an open / close execution mode in which a prize in the special electric prize device 32 is enabled. The special electric winning device 32 has a large winning opening (not shown) communicating with the back side of the game board 24 and an opening / closing door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening / closing door 32a is arranged in one of a closed state and an open state. More specifically, the opening / closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won, and is switched to an open state in which game balls can be won when a transition to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery. It has become. Incidentally, the open / close execution mode is a mode to which a shift is made when a winning result is obtained. In the closed state, a prize is not impossible, but a prize may be less likely to occur than in the open state.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration related to discharge of game balls flowing down the game area PA.

  As described above, a game ball that has entered any of the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a is discharged from the gaming area PA. In other words, the game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism 27 and flowing into the game area PA is one of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a. Is discharged from the game area PA by entering the ball. A game ball that has entered one of the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a is guided to the back side of the gaming board 24.

  On the back surface of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 42 to 48 are formed corresponding to the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, respectively. . The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passages 42 to 48 flow down the discharge passages 42 to 48 that flow in, and are guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24, and are discharged to a discharge ball collection unit (not shown). Collected. The game balls collected by the discharge ball collection unit are discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

  Various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting game balls are provided in the respective discharge passages 42 to 48. The discharge passages 42 to 48 and the detection sensors 42a to 48a will be described below. Since the four general winning openings 31 are provided as described above, there are discharge passage portions 42 to 44 corresponding to each of the four. In this case, one detection sensor 42a is provided for each of the first discharge passage 42 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 and the second discharge passage 43 corresponding to the general winning opening 31 adjacent to the right. 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the first discharge passage portion 42, and the detection range is provided in the middle position of the second discharge passage portion 43. The second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so as to be present. The game ball that has entered the leftmost general winning opening 31 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a while passing through the first discharge passage section 42, and the game has entered the general winning opening 31 adjacent to the right. The ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage portion 43. Further, a third discharge passage portion 44 formed so as to join the two general winning openings 31 on the right side at an intermediate position is provided. The third discharge passage portion 44 has an entrance-side area corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31 and has one exit-side area by merging the entrance-side areas in the middle. are doing. The third winning opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that the detection range exists at a position in the middle of the exit side region in the third discharge passage portion 44. A game ball entering one of the two right winning holes 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a while passing through the third discharge passage portion 44.

  A fourth discharge passage portion 45 is provided corresponding to the special electric winning device 32. A special power detection sensor 45a is provided so that a detection range exists at an intermediate position of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and a game ball that has entered the special power winning device 32 passes through the fourth discharge passage portion 45. It is detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a. A fifth discharge passage 46 is provided corresponding to the first operation port 33. The first working port detection sensor 46a is provided so that a detection range exists at an intermediate position of the fifth discharge passage section 46, and a game ball entering the first working port 33 passes through the fifth discharge passage section 46. It is detected by the first working port detection sensor 46a during the passage. A sixth discharge passage portion 47 is provided corresponding to the second operation port 34. A second operating port detection sensor 47a is provided so that a detection range exists at an intermediate position of the sixth discharging path section 47, and a game ball entering the second operating port 34 passes through the sixth discharging path section 47. In the middle of the passage, it is detected by the second working port detection sensor 47a. A seventh discharge passage portion 48 exists corresponding to the out port 24a. An out-mouth detection sensor 48a is provided so that a detection range exists at an intermediate position of the seventh discharge passage portion 48. A game ball that has entered the out-open portion 24a passes through the seventh discharge passage portion 48. It is detected by the out mouth detection sensor 48a.

  The game ball detected by any one of the various detection sensors 42a to 48a is not detected by any of the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. A gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and a game ball passing through the through gate 35 while flowing down the game area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

  As each of the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used, but any sensor can be used as long as it can individually detect game balls. The various detection sensors 42a to 49a are electrically connected to a main control device 60 described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, each of the detection sensors 42a to 49a outputs a LOW level signal when a game ball is not detected, and outputs an HI level signal when a game ball is detected. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 so that substantially the entire game area PA can be visually recognized from the front. The window 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is formed of glass to be colorless and transparent, but is not limited to this. The window panel 52 may be formed of colorless and transparent by synthetic resin, and the game area PA is formed through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. It may be formed colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

  Above the window 51, a display light emitting section 53 is provided. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 54 for outputting a sound effect or the like according to a game state is provided. Below the window 51, an upper swelling portion 55 and a lower swelling portion 56 swelling toward the near side are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper plate 55a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later, and guiding the game balls to the game ball firing mechanism 27 side while aligning them in a line. The lower plate 56a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper plate 55a.

  Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 60 for controlling a main game is mounted on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). FIG. 5 is a front view of main controller 60.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. An MPU 62 is mounted on an element mounting surface, which is one plate surface of the main control board 61. The board box 60a is formed transparent so that the MPU 62 housed in the board box 60a can be viewed from outside the board box 60a. Although the substrate box 60a is formed to be colorless and transparent, the substrate box 60a may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 62 accommodated in the substrate box 60a can be viewed from the outside of the substrate box 60a. The main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 such that the opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control substrate 61 in the substrate box 60a faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, by opening the gaming machine main body 12 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and exposing the back surface of the resin base 21, the opposing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a can be visually observed, and The MPU 62 can be viewed through the opposing wall 60b.

  The substrate box 60a is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies 60c in front and back. The plurality of case bodies 60c prevent the case bodies 60c from being separated from each other. Is provided. The plurality of coupling portions 60e are arranged in parallel on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped substrate box 60a. Accordingly, even if the case body 60c is separated by breaking the part joint part 60e in a state in which the separation of the case body 60c is prevented using the part joint part 60e, another case By setting the portion 60e in the coupled state, it is possible to prevent the case body 60c from being separated again. Also, when the case body 60c is separated, the joint 60e is broken and traces thereof remain, so that it is possible to visually check the joint 60e to determine whether or not the case body 60c is illegally separated. It becomes possible. In addition, a sealing seal 60f is attached to one side of the substrate box 60a opposite to the side on which the connecting portions 60e are arranged side by side so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies 60c. When the sealing seal 60f is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case body 60c. This makes it possible to leave a trace of the sealing seal 60f peeled off when the case body 60c is separated.

  In the main control device 60 having the above configuration, the main control board 61 is owned by the administrator of the gaming hall to generate an opportunity to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the range from “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. A setting key insertion section 68a in which a setting key is inserted and turned on; an update button 68b operated to sequentially change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on; A reset button 68c operated to clear data in a main RAM 65 described later provided in the MPU 62 of the 60, a first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c for notifying management results of the game history. , Are provided. A connection terminal of the external device is connected to the MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 so that the management result of the game history or the information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 can be read by the external device. Terminal 68d for reading is provided. In addition, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to the six stages of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, and is arbitrary as long as it is a plurality of stages.

  The setting key insertion section 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, the reading terminal 68d (that is, the MPU 62), and the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are all provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 61. ing. The element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the facing wall 60b of the board box 60a as described above, but the setting key insertion section 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, and the reading terminal 68d face each other. It is not covered by the wall 60b. That is, areas facing the setting key insertion section 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, and the reading terminal 68d are formed as individual openings in the opposing wall section 60b. Thus, the setting key can be inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a without the need to open the substrate box 60a, the update button 68b can be pressed, and the reset button 68c is pressed. It is possible to connect a connection terminal of an external device to the reading terminal 68d.

  When the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion section 68a and rotated in a predetermined direction, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on. By starting the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 in that state (that is, by starting the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60), the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. It becomes a state that can be changed. Then, each time the update button 68b is pressed once in this state, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed one step at a time in the range of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" in ascending order. When the update button 68b is operated in the state of "setting 6," the setting is updated to "setting 1." Further, the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion portion 68a is rotated from the ON operation position in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction to return to the initial position, thereby setting the setting key insertion portion 68a to the OFF position. Become. When the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off, the changeable state ends, and the game can be performed with the state of the set value at that time. That is, even if the update button 68b is operated after the changeable state ends, the set value cannot be changed.

  The ON operation on the setting key insertion section 68a is valid only when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is started). Therefore, even if the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 performs an ON operation on the setting key insertion section 68a after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed, the setting value cannot be changed.

  The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 determines the advantage per unit time in the pachinko machine 10, and the larger the value of “setting n” (n is an integer of “1” to “6”), the larger the value of n (that is, the larger the setting). The higher the value, the greater the advantage. Although details will be described later, there are a low probability mode in which the winning probability is relatively low and a high probability mode in which the winning probability is relatively high as the winning / rejecting lottery mode for determining the winning probability of the jackpot result, and the setting value is It is set so that the higher the value, the higher the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode. On the other hand, the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode is constant regardless of the setting value.

  The reset button 68c is operated to clear the data in the main RAM 65 as described above. However, in order to cause the data to be cleared, the operation power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 while the reset button 68c is pressed. (That is, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60). The ON operation on the reset button 68c is valid only when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if the reset button 68c is pressed after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the data in the main RAM 65 cannot be cleared.

  As described above, the connection terminal of the external device is connected to the read terminal 68d for reading the management result of the game history or the information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 by the external device. In order to perform external output to the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the pachinko machine 10 with the connection terminal of the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d (ie, the operation of the main control device 60 to the MPU 62). It is necessary to start supplying power). The connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is valid only when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d after the process at the start of supply of the operating power is completed in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, no external output to the external device is performed.

  Each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is a segment display in which seven LED display segments are arranged. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a light emitter, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. Each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is installed so that its display surface faces the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces, and the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are formed by the opposed wall portion 60b of the board box 60a. Covered. In this case, since the substrate box 60a is formed to be transparent, the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c housed in the substrate box 60a can be viewed from outside the substrate box 60a. It becomes possible. Further, as described above, the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 such that the opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control substrate 61 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 in the board box 60a. Therefore, when the gaming machine body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to third notification via the opposing wall 60b. The display surfaces of the display devices 69a to 69c can be visually observed.

  On the display surface of the first notification display device 69a, not only the numbers "0" to "9" but also various characters including alphabetic characters are displayed. On the other hand, in the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c, numbers “0” to “9” are displayed. The management results of the game history are notified using the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the notification contents will be described later in detail. In a changeable state where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, a value corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. Note that a value corresponding to the set value may be displayed on the first notification display device 69a, or may be displayed on the second notification display device 69b. The set value before the changeable state is displayed on one of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the current set value is displayed in the first to third notification. It is good also as a structure displayed on the other display device for information among the display devices 69a-69c for display.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the rear side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism 73 and a control device assembling unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

  The payout mechanism 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged to the upper plate 55a or the lower plate 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The dispensing mechanism 73 is supplied with a main power of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is mounted with a back pack substrate having a power switch for performing an ON operation and an OFF operation of the power.

  The control device assembling unit 74 includes a payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76, a predetermined power required by various control devices and the like is generated and output, and the control unit 74 operates as the player operates the firing operation device 28. And a power supply / launch control device 78 for controlling the launching of game balls. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / firing control device 78 are arranged one on top of the other so that the payout control device 77 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 for controlling a main game, and a power failure monitoring board 67 for monitoring a power supply. The MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 includes a main-side ROM 64, a main-side RAM 65, and a management IC 66 in addition to the main-side CPU 63, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an operation unit. The MPU 62 includes, in addition to the above elements, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

  The main ROM 64 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require an external power supply for storing and storing data (that is, a nonvolatile storage unit), and is used as a read-only memory. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 63 and fixed value data.

  The main RAM 65 is a memory such as an SRAM and a DRAM that requires an external power supply for storing and storing data (that is, volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 is capable of random access and has a shorter read time than the main ROM 64 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the main ROM 64 is executed.

  The management IC 66 is a management device that manages a game history based on information supplied from the main CPU 63. Although details will be described later, while the management IC 66 grasps the history of the ball entry to the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, Based on the grasped ball entry history, the frequency of ball entry to the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is determined. Further, the occurrence frequency of the open / close execution mode and the high-frequency support mode, which will be described later, is grasped by the management IC 66.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 67 and a payout control device 77 provided in the main control device 60. A power supply / emission control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 67, and the MPU 62 is supplied with operating power via the power failure monitoring board 67.

  Various sensors such as the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As described above, the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a include the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the special power detection sensor 45a, and the first operating opening detection. A sensor 46a, a second working port detection sensor 47a, an out port detection sensor 48a, and a gate detection sensor 49a are included. On the basis of the detection results of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 determines whether or not to enter each incoming ball portion. In addition, the main CPU 63 executes various lotteries based on winning in the first operating port 33 and executes various lotteries based on winning in the second operating port 34.

  On the input side of the MPU 62, a setting key insertion section 68a, an update button 68b, and a reset button 68c provided on the main control board 61 are provided. A sensor (not shown) is provided in the setting key insertion section 68a, and the sensor detects whether the setting key insertion section 68a is located at the ON operation position or the OFF operation position. Then, the main CPU 63 specifies whether the setting key insertion section 68a is located at the ON operation position or the OFF operation position based on the detection result from the sensor. The update button 68b is provided with a sensor (not shown), which detects whether or not the update button 68b is pressed. Then, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the update button 68b is pressed based on the detection result from the sensor. The reset button 68c is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Then, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed based on the detection result from the sensor.

  The output side of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77, and a sound emission control device 81. The payout control device 77 outputs, for example, a prize ball command based on the fact that a game ball has entered the prize ball corresponding entry portion corresponding to the payout of a game ball in the entry portion of the above entry portion. You. Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 81.

  On the output side of the MPU 62, a driving unit 32b for a special power supply for opening and closing the opening / closing door 32a of the special power winning device 32, a driving unit 34b for a general power use for opening and closing the general purpose object 34a of the second operating port 34, The drawing unit 37 and the general drawing unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a and a special figure reservation display section 37b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the general-purpose unit 38 is provided with a general-purpose display unit 38a and a general-purpose reservation display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 controls the driving of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the open / close execution mode, the drive control of the drive unit 32b for the special power is executed in the main CPU 63 so that the special power winning device 32 is opened and closed. In addition, in a case where the open state of the general electric part 34a is won, the main CPU 63 controls the driving of the general electric drive unit 34b so that the general electric part 34a is opened and closed. In addition, at the time of each game, the main CPU 63 executes display control of the special figure display section 37a. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not to bring the general electric handpiece 34a to the open state is specified, the main CPU 63 executes the display control of the general-purpose display unit 38a. Further, when a prize occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, or when the variable display is started in the special figure display section 37a, the main CPU 63 controls the display of the special figure reservation display section 37b. Is executed, and when the winning in the through gate 35 occurs, or when the variable display is started on the general-purpose display unit 38a, the display control of the general-purpose reservation display unit 38b is executed by the main CPU 63.

  First to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. In addition, the management result of the game history in the management IC 66 is notified through the display on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. In this case, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are display-controlled by the management IC 66 and are not display-controlled by the main CPU 63, whereas the third notification display device 69c is controlled by the main CPU 63. The display is controlled and the display is controlled by the management IC 66. In the display of the third notification display device 69c, the display control by the main CPU 63 has priority over the display control by the management IC 66.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the third notification display device 69c may be controlled by the management IC 66 and may not be controlled by the main CPU 63. In this case, when the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the main CPU 63 instructs the management IC 66 to display the setting value. Good.

  The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 68d. A sensor (not shown) is provided at the reading terminal 68d, and the sensor detects whether a connection terminal of an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d. Then, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the connection terminal of the external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d based on the detection result from the sensor. When an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d, the management result of the game history in the management IC 66 or the information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 is externally output to the external device.

  The power failure monitoring board 67 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply / emission control device 78, and monitors a DC stable 24 volt voltage which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of the prize ball and the loaned ball by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

  The power supply / launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, it generates the necessary operating power for the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, and the like, and supplies the generated operating power. Incidentally, the power supply / emission control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit at the time of power failure such as a backup capacitor. Even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in an OFF state, the power supply unit at the time of power failure is mainly supplied from the power supply unit at the time of power failure. Power for storing and storing is supplied to the main RAM 65 and the payout control device 77 of the control device 60. The power supply / launch control device 78 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launching mechanism 27, and the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. The payout mechanism 73 is provided with a power switch as described above. When the power switch is turned on, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, and the power switch is turned off. As a result, the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped.

  The audio light emission control device 81 controls the display light emission unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and controls the display control device 82. It is. The display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the audio light emission control device 81.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main CPU 63>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main CPU 63 uses the various counter information during the game to perform a jackpot occurrence lottery, the setting of the display of the special figure display unit 37a, the setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, the setting of the display of the general symbol display unit 38a, and the like. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, a random number counter C1 used for a lottery of a winning occurrence, a large hit type counter C2 used for determining a big hit type, and a symbol display device 41 The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery at the time of execution, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the display duration on the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41 are determined. And a variation type counter CS. In addition, a general-purpose part opening counter C4 used for a lottery to determine whether or not the general-purpose part 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the general-state open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value every time the counter is updated, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals. Information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is provided as acquisition information storage means in the main RAM 65 when a prize occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port. Is stored in the reserved storage area 65a.

  The hold storage area 65a includes a hold area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and stores a winning history to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port. At the same time, a combination of each numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as the holding information in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4.

  In this case, in the first reserved area RE1 to the fourth reserved area RE4, when a prize to the first working port 33 or the second working port 34 occurs continuously plural times, the first reserved area RE1 → the second reserved area RE4. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the reserved area RE2 → the third reserved area RE3 → the fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 are stored on hold. .

  It should be noted that the number of items that can be held and stored is not limited to four, but may be any number, such as two, three, five or more, or a single number.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 37a. At this time, a determination as to whether or not a hit is made is made based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

  First, the general-purpose object opening counter C4 will be described. For example, the general electric appliance open counter C4 is configured to be incremented by one in the range of 0 to 250, and to return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The general-purpose item release counter C4 is updated periodically, and is stored in the general-purpose holding area 65c of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball has won the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the general purpose electronic part 34a to the open state according to the stored value of the general purpose electronic part opening counter C4.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general purpose electric appliance 34a are different from each other. In detail, in the support mode, when compared with a situation where the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner in the game area PA, the general-purpose electric appliance 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened per unit time. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the state becomes relatively high and low.

  In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the full-power open state in the full-power open lottery using the general-purpose accessory opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the general-purpose part 34a is opened when the general-purpose open state is elected is set to be larger than in the low-frequency support mode, and one open time is set longer. Have been. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the open state is elected and the open state of the common electric role object 34a occurs a plurality of times, the state from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is started. The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum securing time (ie, the time required for the general-purpose opening lottery to be performed after the one general-purpose opening lottery is performed) is smaller than that in the low-frequency support mode. The duration of one display on the display unit 38a) is set short.

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a winning in the second operating port 34 will occur is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the first operating port 33 is higher than in the second operating port 34, but in the high-frequency support mode, the second operating port 33 is more likely to win. The probability that the winning in the mouth 34 will occur increases. In the case where a prize is generated in the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of balls held. It can be carried out.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency in which the high frequency support mode is set to the normal power open state per unit time than the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration. It is good also as a structure which raises the probability of becoming a normal electric power open state winning. In addition, a securing time to be secured after one general-purpose opening lottery is performed and then the next general-purpose opening lottery is performed (for example, executed in the general-purpose display unit 38a based on winning in the through gate 35). In a configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display time are prepared, a setting is made such that a shorter securing time is more easily selected or the average securing time is shorter in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode. Is also good. Further, increasing the number of times of opening, lengthening the opening time, shortening the securing time that is secured after one general power opening lottery is performed after one general power opening lottery is performed, such securing time, By shortening the average time and increasing the probability of winning, one of the conditions or an arbitrary combination of conditions may be applied to increase the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode.

  Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has the setting states of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, but the opening frequency and the opening mode of the general purpose accessory 34a in the low frequency support mode are not limited. The setting value is the same, and the opening frequency and the opening mode of the general purpose accessory 34a in the high frequency support mode are the same regardless of the setting value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At least one of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, at least one of the opening frequency and the opening mode of the general purpose electrical appliance 34a fluctuates according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It may be configured. For example, the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of opening the general purpose electrical item 34a in the low frequency support mode may be. The second operation when the general electrical accessory 34a is opened once in the low frequency support mode. A configuration in which the probability of entering a game ball into the mouth 34 is increased may be adopted. In addition, the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of opening the common electrical object 34a in the high-frequency support mode may be configured to be higher. A configuration in which the probability of entering a game ball into the operating port 34 may be increased.

  Next, the hit random number counter C1 will be described. The hit random number counter C1 is configured to be added one by one in the range of, for example, 0 to 599, and to return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the holding storage area 65a of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored in the main ROM 64 as a winning / failing table. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main ROM 64. As the success / failure table, a low probability / failure table 64a to 64f for the low probability mode and a high probability / failure table 64g for the high probability mode are stored.

  The low-probability tables 64a to 64f are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the setting states of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. In other words, the low-probability table 64a for setting 1 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1”, and the setting referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2” The low-accuracy table 64b for the second, the low-accuracy table 64c for the setting 3 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 3”, and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 4” , A low-probability table 64d for setting 4 referred to when the pachinko machine 10 is set, a low-probability table 64e for setting 5 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 5”, and a pachinko machine 10 And a low-probability table 64f for setting 6 that is referred to when the setting state of “setting 6” is “setting 6”.

  These low-probability tables 64a to 64f are set such that the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot result. Specifically, when the low-probability table 64a for the setting 1 is referred to, the jackpot results at about 1/320, and when the low-probability table 64b for the setting 2 is referred, about 1/310. The result is a jackpot, and when the low-probability table 64c for the setting 3 is referred to, the jackpot results at about 1/300. When the low-probability table 64d for the setting 4 is referred to, the result is about 1/290. , A jackpot result is obtained, and when the low-probability table 64e for setting 5 is referred to, the jackpot result is about 1/280, and when the low-probability table 64f for setting 6 is referred to, about 1/270. The result is a jackpot. As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has a higher setting value, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the low probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

  On the other hand, only one type of the high probability rejection table 64g is provided so as to be common in any of the setting states of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. The high probability of success / failure table 64g is set such that the winning probability of the big hit result is higher than that of the low probability of success / failure tables 64a to 64f regardless of the setting state of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. Specifically, when the high-accuracy determination table 64g is referred to, the jackpot results at about 1/30. This makes it possible to make the high probability mode more advantageous than the low probability mode regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Also, even in the lowest setting state “Setting 1”, the high probability mode makes it possible to increase the probability of the jackpot result as compared with the lowest setting state “Setting 6” low probability mode. Becomes In addition, in the high probability mode, it is possible to prevent the advantage or disadvantage caused by the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from occurring, and to reduce the storage capacity for storing the high accuracy / non-permission table 64g in the main ROM 64 in advance. It becomes possible.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be added one by one in the range of 0 to 29, and to return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the hold storage area 65a at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are (1) the mode of opening / closing control of the special power winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the winning / rejecting lottery means after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and (3) the third mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the three conditions of the support mode of the general-purpose accessory 34a of the second operation port 34.

  The opening / closing control of the special power prize device 32 in the open / close execution mode is performed such that the frequency of winning of the special power prize device 32 between the start and the end of the open / close execution mode is relatively high or low. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in any of the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the game is executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit.

  The round game is a game in which a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls continue to be won in the special power winning device 32 until one of the conditions is satisfied. That is. In addition, the number of round games in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is the same as the fixed round number regardless of the type of the jackpot result triggered by the shift. More specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of open modes of the special power winning device 32 are set so as to have different opening continuation times from when the special power winning device 32 is opened until when the special power winning device 32 is closed. In detail, a long-time mode in which the opening duration is set to 29 seconds, which is a long time, and a short-time mode in which the opening duration is set to 0.06 seconds, which is a short time shorter than the long time, are set. Have been.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the driving control of the game ball launching mechanism 27 is performed so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA in 0.6 seconds. Is done. In the round game, the upper limit number of the end conditions is set to nine. Then, in the long-time mode of the above-described open modes, the open continuation time longer than the product of the launch cycle of the game ball and one round game is set. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, an open continuation time shorter than the product of the launch cycle of the game ball and one round game, more specifically, shorter than the launch cycle of the game ball, is set. Therefore, when one opening is performed in the long-time mode, it is expected that a prize of the upper limit number in one round game is generated in the special prize winning device 32, and 1 in the short-time mode. When the number of times has been opened, it is expected that no prize will be generated in the special power prize winning device 32, or that even if a prize is generated, the number will be about one.

  In the high frequency winning mode, the special power winning device 32 is opened once in a long time mode in each round game. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the special power winning device 32 is opened once in a short time mode in each round game.

  In addition, the number of times of opening and closing of the special power winning device 32 in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are higher than those in the high frequency winning mode. Is not limited to the above value as long as the frequency of winning in the special power winning device 32 during the period from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode to the end thereof is higher than that in the low frequency winning mode. It is.

  The distribution destination of the jackpot result to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 64 as an assignment table 64h as shown in FIG. In the distribution table 64h, a low-probability big-hit result, a low-prize-high-probability big-hit result, and a most-favorable-big-hit result are set as distribution destinations of the big-hit result when the big-hit result is obtained.

  The low-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, the high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

  The low winning high probability big hit result is a big hit result in which the opening and closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the winning / rejecting lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. is there. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the winning / non-winning lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to a big hit state.

  The most advantageous jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the winning / non-winning lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to a big hit state.

  Note that, in relation to the above-mentioned respective game states, the normal game state is not the open / close execution mode, but the state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a low winning high probability big hit result is not set as a game result. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode in the low winning high probability big hit result, the number of round games may be smaller than that in the case of the low probability big hit result and the most advantageous big hit result.

  In the distribution table 64h, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the low winning jackpot result, and “10 to 14” corresponds to the low winning high jackpot result. "15-29" corresponds to the most advantageous jackpot result.

  Only one type of distribution table 64h is provided so as to be common in any of the setting states of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. This makes it possible to avoid the advantage or disadvantage caused by the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the distribution mode of the jackpot result, and to store the distribution table 64h in the main ROM 64 in advance. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the distribution mode of the jackpot results may be different depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the higher the set value, the higher the probability of being allocated to the most advantageous big hit result, and the higher the set value, the higher the probability of being allocated to the most advantageous big hit result or low winning high probability big hit result. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of the high probability mode after the jackpot result is achieved. Also, the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of being distributed to the low prize winning jackpot result. The higher the setting value, the lower the probability of being distributed to the high prize winning jackpot result, whereas the lower the setting value, the lower the winning probability. It is good also as composition which can be distributed to a jackpot result. In this case, it is possible to increase the probability that the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode will occur as the set value increases.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 238, and to return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a type of display effect on the symbol display device 41. The expected effect is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display of symbols, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is an assignment corresponding result in a game time in which a predetermined jackpot result is obtained, the symbol display device 41 is provided. This is a display state for making the player think that the variable display state is likely to be the above-mentioned provision result at the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the start of the variable display of the symbol. It should be noted that, specifically, the combination of symbols with the same numeral attached to one of the activated lines is stopped and displayed.

  Two types of expected effects are set: a reach display, and a preview display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display and the generation of the assignment correspondence result at a stage before the reach display occurs.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying symbols in some of the symbol columns among a plurality of symbol columns displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and displaying the remaining combinations in that state. A display state in which a symbol is fluctuated in the symbol row is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of the reach symbols is displayed as described above, while performing the variation display of the symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or displayed, and a reach effect is displayed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a.

  In the notice display, a state in which symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol rows after the symbol variable display is started on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, or a plurality of symbols in some symbol rows. In a situation in which symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol row is included. Further, the background screen may have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and the symbol on the symbol row may have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice display may occur at any of the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the display when the reach display is performed is higher than when the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed irrespective of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game cycle in which the same symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed. Further, in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, the combination is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the game time corresponding to the result of the departure is executed when the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. .

  On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to display the advance notice is made not by the main control device 60 but by the sound emission control device 81. In this case, the sound emission control device 81 indicates that the notice display is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any one of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the missed result, and that the notice display with a low appearance rate is performed. A lottery process for displaying a notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions of easy occurrence. Incidentally, this lottery result is reflected when the effect for the game round is executed on the symbol display device 41.

  Here, the probability of occurrence of the reach display in the game times resulting in the departure is the same regardless of the setting state of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the advantage or disadvantage caused by the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the probability that the reach display is generated in the game time that results in the departure. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the higher the set value, the higher the probability of occurrence of the reach display in a game time that results in a deviation.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used by the main CPU 63 to determine the display duration on the special figure display unit 37a and the display duration on the symbol on the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time until the next timer interrupt process is executed. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the time of determining the variation pattern at the time of starting the variation display on the special figure display unit 37a and at the time of starting the symbol variation by the symbol display device 41.

<About the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed by the main CPU 63 to advance the game will be described. The processing of the main CPU 63 is roughly classified into a main processing started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing started periodically (in the present embodiment, at a period of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait processing, for example, the apparatus waits without advancing to the next processing until a predetermined time for waiting (specifically, 1 second) elapses after the main processing is started. In the execution period of the power-on wait processing, the operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned ON (step S103). If the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned ON (step S103: NO), it is determined whether the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S104). When the reset button 68c is pressed (step S104: YES), each area of the main RAM 65 is set to “except for the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the main RAM 65. "0" is cleared (step S105). In other words, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while the reset button 68c is pressed and operated without the ON operation of the setting key insertion section 68a, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 The clear process of the main RAM 65 is executed while maintaining the state before the power supply is stopped. Thus, it is possible to initialize another area of the main RAM 65 without changing the set value.

  If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step S104: NO), it is determined whether the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S106). The power failure flag is provided in the main RAM 65, and when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and the predetermined power failure processing is normally executed, the power failure flag is set to “1”. Is set. If "1" is set in the power failure flag, it is determined whether or not the calculation result of the checksum matches the checksum stored when the power was turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S107). . When the process in step S105 is executed or when the affirmative determination is made in step S107, it is determined whether the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal by checking the main RAM 65 (step S108). Specifically, when the setting value is any one of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, it is determined to be normal, and when it is “0” or 7 or more, it is determined to be abnormal.

  If a negative determination is made in any of steps S106 to S108, an operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, after an error notification process for notifying the hole manager or the like of the occurrence of an error is performed (step S109), an infinite loop is performed. The operation prohibition processing is released by executing the later-described all clear processing (step S117).

  If an affirmative determination is made in all of steps S106 to S108, a power-on setting process is executed (step S110). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 65 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. After executing the process of step S110, a recognition process for causing the management IC 66 to recognize various information (step S111) and various data are output to an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d of the MPU 62. A data output process is performed (step S112). Details of the recognition processing and the data output processing will be described later.

  Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited when the main process is started. The state in which the generation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited is released at a timing before the processing in step S113 is executed after the processing in step S112 is completed, and the execution of the timer interrupt processing is permitted. As a result, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process of step S112 is completed, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the process of step S113 is started. Therefore, the processing for advancing the game by the main CPU 63 is not started until the situation is reached.

  After that, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S113 to S116. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies in accordance with the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining process of steps S113 to S116 is repeatedly executed using the irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S113 to S116 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S113, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of the timer interrupt process. In the following step S114, a random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S115, a fluctuation counter updating process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed. In these updating processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 65, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the counter of the read source is executed. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value, each is cleared to “0”. After that, in step S116, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted is performed. When the process in step S116 has been performed, the process returns to step S113, and the processes in steps S113 to S116 are repeated.

  On the other hand, when the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on (step S103: YES), the main RAM 65 includes the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. All areas are cleared to "0" (step S117). That is, when an operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is being performed, all areas of the main RAM 65 are cleared to "0" even if the reset button 68c is not pressed. The present invention is not limited to this, and even if an operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, if the reset button 68c is not pressed, the entire main RAM 65 is not operated. The clearing process may not be executed, and the entire clearing process may be executed when the operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the reset button 68c is pressed.

  Thereafter, in step S118, a set value update process is executed, and in step S119, a process of outputting a set value update signal is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S110. Hereinafter, the setting value update processing will be described. The output processing of the set value update signal will be described later in detail. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the setting value updating process.

  First, "1" is set to a set value counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S201). The set value counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which set value the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is. When the set value counter is set to “1”, when the set value updating process is executed, the set value becomes “set 1” regardless of the set value up to that time.

  Thereafter, a setting value display start process is executed (step S202). In the setting value display start processing, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that the number “1” corresponding to “setting 1” is displayed. When changing the set value, the manager of the game hall can check the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by checking the third notification display device 69c.

  Thereafter, on condition that the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned OFF (step S203: NO), it is determined whether or not the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S204). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S204, the process returns to step S203, and it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned off.

  When the update button 68b is pressed once (step S204: YES), the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S205). If the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds 6 (step S206: YES), “1” is set to the set value counter (step S207). Thus, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the setting value is updated to the next higher level, and when the update button 68b is pressed once in the situation of “setting 6,” the setting is changed to “setting 1.” I will return.

  If a negative determination is made in step S206, or if the process in step S207 is performed, a display update process of the set value is performed (step S208). In the display update processing of the set value, the display control of the third notification display device 69c is performed so that the number corresponding to the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is displayed. The administrator of the gaming hall can check the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b by checking the third notification display device 69c.

  After executing the process of step S208, the process returns to step S203, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned OFF. If the OFF operation has not been performed (step S203: NO), the processing after step S204 is executed again. If the operation has been turned off (step S203: YES), display end processing of the set value is executed (step S209). In the display end processing of the set value, the display of the set value on the third notification display device 69c is ended.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt processing is executed periodically (for example, at a period of 4 milliseconds).

  First, power outage information storage processing is executed (step S301). In the power failure information storage processing, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power interruption has been received from the power failure monitoring board 67. Become. In the process at the time of power failure, the power failure flag in the main RAM 65 is set to “1”, a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored.

  Thereafter, a random number updating process for lottery is executed (step S302). In the random number update process for lottery, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general public goods open counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read out from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general public goods open counter C4, and a process of adding one to each of the read numerical information is executed. Thereafter, a process of overwriting the counter of the read source is executed. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value, each is cleared to “0”. Thereafter, in step S303, a random number initial value updating process is executed as in step S114, and in step S304, a fluctuation counter updating process is executed as in step S115.

  Thereafter, a fraud detection process is performed to monitor whether a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred (step S305). In the fraud detection processing, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to “1”. In the following step S306, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S306, the processing from step S307 is executed.

  In step S307, a port output process is performed. In the port output process, when output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting an output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special power winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special power driver 32b is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. If the information to switch the general-purpose part 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the general-purpose driving unit 34b is started and the state is switched to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  Thereafter, a reading process is executed (step S308). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes.

  Thereafter, a ball entry detection process is executed (step S309). In the incoming ball detection process, the signals received from the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a are read, and based on the read result, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33. , The presence or absence of a ball entering the second operation port 34 and the through gate 35 is specified. The details of the incoming ball detection process will be described later.

  Thereafter, a timer update process for updating numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S310). In this case, the configuration is such that timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are collectively handled. It may be configured.

  After that, a launch control process for performing launch control of the game ball is executed (step S311). In a situation where the firing operation to the firing operation device 28 is continued, one game ball is fired in a predetermined firing cycle of 0.6 sec. In subsequent step S312, as input state monitoring processing, based on the information read in the reading processing in step S308, disconnection confirmation of each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a and confirmation of opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed. I do.

  Thereafter, a special figure special power control process for performing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed (step S313). The special figure special power control processing will be described later in detail.

  After that, the general-purpose control process is executed (step S314). In the general-purpose general-purpose control process, a process for acquiring general-purpose side hold information is performed when a winning in the through gate 35 has occurred, and when general-purpose side hold information is stored. Then, a release determination is made for the hold information, and a process for performing an effect for ordinary drawing is executed with the release determination as an opportunity. In addition, based on the result of the opening determination, a process of opening and closing the general purpose accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is executed. In this case, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed, and if the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed. Further, in the case of the opening / closing execution mode, even if the immediately preceding support mode is the high frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is set.

  In the following step S315, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S313 and S314, the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the special figure display section 37a in the special figure hold display section 37b is set, and Then, the output information is set to reflect the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the general-purpose display unit 38a on the general-purpose display unit 38b. In step S315, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S313 and S314, output information for updating the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a is set, and the display contents of the general figure display unit 38a are changed. Set the output information to be updated.

  Thereafter, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and a payout state receiving process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (step S316). Further, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S317). Further, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed (step S318). Thereafter, a management output process for outputting information corresponding to the ball entry result of the game ball in the game area PA to the management IC 66 is executed (step S319). Details of the management output process will be described later.

  Next, the special figure special power control processing in step S313 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, a process of acquiring hold information is executed (step S401). In the process of acquiring the hold information, it is determined whether or not a prize has occurred in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, and if a prize has occurred, the number of holds in the hold storage area 65a is limited to an upper limit. It is determined whether the value is less than the value (“4” in the present embodiment). If the number of reservations is less than the upper limit, the number of reservations is incremented by one, and the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S302 are used for the hold. It is stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the area RE. When the winning in the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 occurs simultaneously, the processing for acquiring the suspension information is performed within a range in which the acquisition processing of the suspension information is performed once. Execute multiple times. When a new acquisition of the hold information is performed, a corresponding acquisition command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. When receiving the command, the sound emission control device 81 updates the display of the image indicating the number of pieces of hold information on the symbol display device 41 to display content corresponding to the increase of the hold information.

  Thereafter, the information of the special figure special power counter provided in the main RAM 65 is read (step S402), and the special figure special power address table provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step S403). Then, a start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special power counter is acquired from the special figure special power address table (step S404), and the processing jumps to the processing indicated by the obtained start address among the processing of steps S406 to S412 (step S405). ). The special figure special power counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to know which of the various processes of steps S406 to S412 should be executed. The special figure special power address table stores the special figure special power counter. A start address of a program for executing the processing of steps S406 to S412 is set in association with the numerical information.

  In step S406, a special figure change start process is executed. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the special figure change start processing.

  In the special figure change start processing, the data setting processing is executed (step S502) on the condition that the number of pieces of hold information stored in the hold area RE is one or more (step S501: YES). In the data setting process, first, the number of holds is decremented by one, and the data stored in the first hold area RE1 of the hold area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in each of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth holding areas RE1 to RE4 to the lower area side. Specifically, the second shifting area RE2 → the first holding area RE1 Then, the data in each area is shifted in the order of the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, the fourth reserved area RE4 → the third reserved area RE3, and then the fourth reserved area RE4 is cleared to “0”. At this time, a shift-time command for recognizing that the data in the holding area has been shifted is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. When receiving the command, the voice light emission control device 81 updates the display of the image indicating the number of pieces of hold information on the symbol display device 41 to display content corresponding to the decrease of the hold information.

  After executing the data setting process, the success / failure table is read from the main ROM 64 (step S503). Specifically, first, the information indicating the current winning / rejecting lottery mode is read out from the main RAM 65 to grasp the current winning / rejecting lottery mode. In the case of the high probability mode, the high probability correct / non-permissible table 64g is read from the main ROM 64. On the other hand, in the case of the low probability mode, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is grasped by reading the value of the setting value counter of the main RAM 65. Then, the low-probability tables 64a to 64f corresponding to the set values that have been grasped are read from the main ROM 64.

  After that, it executes a hit / fail judgment process with reference to the hit / fail tables 64a to 64g read in step S503 (step S504). In the success / failure determination process, the information for success / failure determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the numerical information related to the hit random number counter C1, is the big hit numerical information set in the success / failure tables 64a to 64g read in step S503. It is determined whether or not they match.

  If the result of the success / failure determination process is a jackpot winning result (step S505: YES), the distribution determination process is executed (step S506). In the distribution determination processing, information for distribution determination, that is, numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2 is read out of the information stored in the execution area AE. Then, referring to the distribution table 64h provided in the main-side ROM 64, it identifies which of the jackpot results the read-out numerical information on the jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to. Specifically, it specifies which jackpot result corresponds to the low jackpot result, the low winning jackpot result, or the most advantageous jackpot result.

  After that, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S507). Specifically, in the game time related to the start of the fluctuation, the information of the pattern form to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a is obtained from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. The specified information is written to the main RAM 65. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, information on the mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a is set differently for each type of the jackpot result.

  Thereafter, a flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S508). Specifically, the main-side RAM 65 is provided with flags corresponding to the types of the jackpot results. "1" is set to the flag corresponding to the result.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S505 that the result is not the jackpot winning result, a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed (step S509). Specifically, the information of the pattern form to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game time related to the start of the fluctuation is obtained from the stop result table for the departure result stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. The specified information is written to the main RAM 65. In this case, the information on the pattern aspect selected is different from the information on the pattern aspect selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  After executing any of the processes of step S508 and step S509, a process of grasping the duration of the game is executed (step S510). In this processing, numerical information of the variation type counter CS is obtained. In addition, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated on the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game time related to the start of the current fluctuation is the low-probability jackpot result or the most advantageous jackpot result, it is determined that the reach display is generated. If none of the jackpot results is found and the numerical information on the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach display is generated.

  When it is determined that the reach display is generated, the duration of the game corresponding to the numerical information of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation duration table stored in the main ROM 64. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the continuation of the game times corresponding to the numerical information of the current fluctuation type counter CS is referred to by referring to the reach non-occurrence continuation period table stored in the main ROM 64. Get the period. Incidentally, the duration of the game times that can be acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence duration table is different from the duration of the game times that can be acquired by referring to the reach occurrence duration table.

  Note that the duration of the game times when no reach occurs is set such that the longer the number of pieces of hold information stored in the holding area RE, the shorter the duration of the game times. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the case where the support mode is the low frequency support mode, a shorter duration of the game times is selected. A REACH non-occurrence duration table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the duration of the game times may not be changed according to the number of the hold information or the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Further, the above-described configuration may be applied to a continuation period of a game round when a reach occurs. In addition, a duration table may be individually set for each of the various jackpot results, the case of the out-of-reach reach, and the case of the out-of-reach non-occurrence result. In this case, the distribution of the continuation period of the game times according to each game result is performed.

  Thereafter, the information on the duration of the game times acquired in step S510 is set in a special figure special power timer counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S511). Updating of the numerical information set in the special figure special power timer counter is executed in a timer updating process (step S310). By the way, as the effect for the game round, the variable display of the pattern on the special figure display section 37a and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 are performed. Is displayed over the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec) in a state in which the stop result is displayed (a state in which a predetermined combination of symbols is on the active line in the symbol display device 41). In this case, the duration of the game times acquired in step S510 is the total time for one game time.

  Thereafter, the change command and the type command are transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S512). The change command includes information on the duration of the game. Here, as described above, the duration of the game times acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence duration table is different from the duration of the game times acquired with reference to the reach occurrence duration table. Even if the fluctuation command does not include information on whether or not reach has occurred, the sound emission control device 81 can specify whether or not reach has occurred from the information on the duration of the game times. In this regard, it can be said that the fluctuation command includes information indicating whether or not the reach has occurred. Note that the fluctuation command may include information directly indicating whether or not the reach has occurred. The type command includes information on the game result.

  When the voice emission control device 81 receives the change command and the type command from the main CPU 63, the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 execute an effect for playing a game. In this case, the effect for the game round is performed in a mode corresponding to the contents of the change command and the type command. In addition, in the symbol display device 41, a symbol variation display is performed as an effect for the game round, and when the effect for the game round ends, a combination of symbols corresponding to the results of the hit / fail determination processing and the distribution determination processing is displayed. Stopped and displayed.

  After that, the variation display of the picture on the special figure display section 37a is started (step S513). Then, the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 (step S514). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed is “0”, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is “1”. Thereafter, "1" is set to the eleventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S515). The eleventh output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that the game round has been started is to be executed to the management IC 66.

  Returning to the description of the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 52), in step S407, the special figure changing processing is executed. In the special figure changing process, it is determined whether or not the timing is during the continuation time of the game times and before the final stop display. A process for changing the target is executed. When the timing for the final stop display comes, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special figure special power counter, the numerical information of the counter is changed from the processing corresponding to the special figure changing processing to the special figure fixing processing. Update to something. In this embodiment, the final stop command is not transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound emission control device 81.

  In step S408, a special figure fixing process is executed. In the special figure determination process, the display mode of the picture on the special figure display section 37a is set to a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game. In the special figure determination process, it is determined whether or not the final stop period has elapsed, and if the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not a shift to the open / close execution mode occurs. If the shift to the open / close execution mode does not occur, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is cleared to “0”. When the shift to the open / close execution mode occurs, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by one to change the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special figure fixing processing to the one corresponding to the special power starting processing. Update.

  In step S409, special power start processing is executed. In the special power starting process, if the process for starting the opening period in the current open / close execution mode has not been executed, the opening period setting process is executed. Further, an opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 to execute the opening effect. If the opening period has elapsed, a start process for starting the first round game is executed. In the start processing, the special power winning device 32 is set to the open state, and the end condition of the round game is set. In setting the end condition, an upper limit duration time when the special power winning device 32 is continued to be opened in the current first round game is set, and the special power winning device 32 can be won in the current first round game. The upper limit number of game balls is set in a winning number counter provided in the main RAM 65.

  In step S410, a special power opening process is executed. In the special power opening process, it is determined whether or not a round game end condition is satisfied. If the end condition is satisfied, the special power winning device 32 is closed. Then, if the round game ended this time is not the last round game, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by one, and the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special power open processing to the special power closed processing. If the round game ended this time is the last run round game, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is added by 2, and the numerical information of the counter corresponds to the special power open processing. It is updated from the one corresponding to the special power termination processing.

  In step S411, a special power closing process is executed. In the special power closing process, it is determined whether or not an interval period between round games has elapsed. The interval period is set when the previous round game ends. When the interval period has elapsed, the special power winning device 32 is set in an open state, and an end condition of the round game is set. Then, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the special figure special power counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special power closing processing to the one corresponding to the special power opening processing.

  In step S412, a special power termination process is performed. In the special power ending process, if the process for starting the ending period in the current open / close execution mode has not been executed, the ending period (for example, 5 seconds) is set, and the ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Upon receiving the ending command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 to execute an ending effect. When the ending period has elapsed, each of the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is set to a mode corresponding to the jackpot result that triggered the start of the current opening / closing execution mode.

  Next, in the main CPU 63, based on the detection results of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the out port 24a, the general prize port 31, the special power prize device 32, the first operation port 33, the second operation port 34, and the through port. A configuration for specifying whether or not a game ball has entered the gate 35 will be described. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration in which the detection results of the incoming ball detection sensors 42 a to 49 a are input to the main CPU 63.

  The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that eight types of signals can be handled simultaneously. An area in which information of “0” or “1” is stored according to the voltage of each signal is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the area includes the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7. Also, more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 63a. In order to limit the number of simultaneously input targets to eight types, a signal group to be input to the input port 63a is determined by the driver IC. It is switched through the switching control.

  In the incoming ball detection process (step S309) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), a signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set to a signal group from each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a. In such a setting, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the first bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special power detection sensor 45a. , The fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first working port detection sensor 46a, and the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working port detection sensor 47a. Six bits D6 store information corresponding to the detection signal from the out mouth detection sensor 48a, and the seventh bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a. It is.

  Each of the above-mentioned incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a outputs a LOW level signal indicating that detection is not being performed as a detection signal when the passage of a game ball is not detected, and detects the passage of the game ball. In this case, an HI level signal indicating that detection is being performed is output as a detection signal. The input port 63a stores “0” information for a corresponding bit when a LOW level signal is received, and stores “1” for a corresponding bit when a HI level signal is received. The information of is stored. In other words, in the situation where the passing of the game ball is not detected by the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, information of "0" corresponding to the information indicating that the ball is not detected is stored in the corresponding bit, and the passage of the game ball is determined. In the detected state, the information of “1” corresponding to the information indicating that the bit is being detected is stored for the corresponding bit.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the incoming ball detection process executed in step S309 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

  When it is confirmed that the state where the information of “0” is stored in the 0th bit D0 is changed to the state where the information of “1” is stored, one first winning opening detection sensor 42a detects one switch. It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S601: YES). In this case, the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S602), and the value of the ten prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S603). . The first output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a should be executed to the management IC 66. It is a flag. The ten prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times that payout of ten game balls should be executed by the main CPU 63. When the value of the ten-prize-ball counter is 1 or more, the ten-prize-ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and the ten-prize-ball command is output. When the command is output once, the value of the ten prize balls counter is decremented by one. When receiving the ten prize ball commands, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that ten game balls are paid out.

  When it is confirmed that the state where the information of “0” is stored in the first bit D1 is changed to the state where the information of “1” is stored, one second winning opening detection sensor 43a detects one state. It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S604: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the second output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S605), and the value of the ten prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S606). . The second output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a should be executed to the management IC 66. It is a flag.

  When it is confirmed that the state where the information of “0” is stored in the second bit D2 is changed to the state where the information of “1” is stored, one third winning opening detection sensor 44a detects one switch. It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S607: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S608), and the value of the ten prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S609). . The third output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a should be executed to the management IC 66. It is a flag.

  When it is confirmed that the state where the information of “0” is stored in the third bit D3 is changed to the state where the information of “1” is stored, one game ball is detected by the special power detection sensor 45a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S610: YES). In this case, the special power winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S611), and the fourth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S612). The value of the 15 award ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S613). The special power winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the special power winning device 32 in the round game in the open / close execution mode. In the special figure special power control processing (step S313) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), by confirming that the special power winning flag is set to "1", one game ball is inserted into the special power winning apparatus 32. It is determined that a ball has been generated, and the remaining number of balls that can enter the special power winning device 32 in the round game is decremented by one. When the process of subtracting one from the number of possible balls is executed, the special power winning flag is cleared to “0”. The fourth output flag is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63 that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the special power detection sensor 45a should be executed to the management IC 66. . The 15 prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the payout of 15 game balls should be executed by the main CPU 63. If the value of the 15-prize-ball counter is 1 or more, the 15-prize-ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output processing of step S317 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), and the 15-prize-ball is output. When the command is output once, the value of the 15 prize balls counter is decremented by one. When receiving the 15 prize ball commands, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out.

  When it is confirmed that the state where the information of “0” is stored in the fourth bit D4 is changed to the state where the information of “1” is stored, one first opening detection sensor 46a detects one switch. It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S614: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S615), and the fifth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S616). Then, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S617). The first operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the first operation port 33. In the special figure special power control processing (step S313) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), by confirming that the first operation winning flag is set to "1", the first operation winning flag is stored in the hold area RE of the hold storage area 65a. On the condition that the number of pieces of pending information stored is less than the upper limit number of four, a process of newly storing the pending information is executed. It is confirmed that the first operation winning flag is set to "1" in the special electric power controlling process (step S313), and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0". I do. The fifth output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a should be executed to the management IC 66. This is a flag. The one prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times that one game ball should be paid out by the main CPU 63. When the value of the one-prize-ball counter is 1 or more, the one-prize-ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and the one-prize-ball is also provided. When the command is output once, the value of the one prize ball counter is decremented by one. When receiving the one prize ball command, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out.

  When it is confirmed that the state where the information of “0” is stored in the fifth bit D5 is changed to the state where the information of “1” is stored, one second opening detection sensor 47a detects one switch. It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S618: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S619), and "1" is set to the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S620). Then, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S621). The second operation winning flag is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63 that one game ball has entered the second operation port 34. In the special figure special electric power control processing (step S313) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), by confirming that the second operation winning flag is set to "1", it is stored in the holding area RE of the holding storage area 65a. On the condition that the number of pieces of pending information stored is less than the upper limit number of four, processing for newly storing the pending information is executed. It is confirmed that "1" is set in the second operation winning flag in the special electric power controlling process (step S313), and when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0". I do. The sixth output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a should be executed to the management IC 66. It is a flag.

  When it is confirmed that the state where the information of “0” is stored in the sixth bit D6 is changed to the state where the information of “1” is stored, one game ball is detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a. Is detected (step S622: YES). In this case, "7" is set to the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S623). The seventh output flag is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63 that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a should be executed to the management IC 66. is there.

  When it is confirmed that the state where the information of "0" is stored in the seventh bit D7 is changed to the state where the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S624: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S625). The gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the general-purpose power control process (step S314) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), by confirming that the gate winning flag is set to "1", the general-purpose power stored in the general-power holding area 65c is confirmed. Processing of storing the current numerical information of the general-purpose accessory opening counter C4 in the general-purpose holding area 65c as general-purpose side holding information, provided that the number of hold information on the side is less than the upper limit number of four. Execute It is confirmed that "1" is set in the gate winning flag in the ordinary figure control process (step S314), and when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the gate winning flag is cleared to "0".

  Since the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started at a period of 4 msec as described above, when one game ball is detected by one of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the ball is entered. In the situation where the detection of the one game ball is continued by the detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 determines that one game ball has been detected by the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a. Done. Therefore, it is sufficient that the first to seventh output flags are provided one by one.

  Next, the contents of processing executed by the payout control device 77 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the payout control device 77 and various devices that communicate with the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  The payout control device 77 includes an MPU 91. The MPU 91 incorporates a payout ROM 93, a payout RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like, in addition to the payout CPU 92 which is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and a calculation unit.

  The payout side ROM 93 is a memory such as a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory which does not require an external power supply for storing and holding (that is, a non-volatile storage means), and is used as a read-only memory. The payout ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the payout CPU 92 and fixed value data.

  The payout side RAM 94 is a memory such as an SRAM and a DRAM that requires an external power supply for storing and storing data (that is, volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The payout RAM 94 is capable of random access and has a shorter read time than the payout ROM 93 when compared with the same data capacity. The payout RAM 94 temporarily stores various data and the like in response to the execution of the control program stored in the payout ROM 93.

  The payout CPU 92 is capable of performing bidirectional communication with the main CPU 63. Upon receiving the prize ball command from the main CPU 63, the payout CPU 92 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. The payout-side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the game balls can be normally paid out. If the payout-side CPU 92 specifies that the game balls cannot be normally paid out, the payout-side RAM 94 is stored in the payout RAM 94. The payout device 76 is stopped even in a situation where the unpaid prize ball number information is stored. In addition, the payout-side CPU 92 transmits a payout restriction command to the main-side CPU 63 indicating that the payout is not normally performed. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 execute a notification indicating that the payout of the game balls is not normally performed. The notification command is transmitted to the voice light emission control device 81 so as to be executed. As a state where it is not possible to normally pay out the game balls, a full state where the lower plate 56a is full of the game balls, a state where the game balls are not refilled in the tank 75, and a state where the ball is not replenished, the payout device 76 There is an abnormal payout state in which does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is opened from the inner frame 13. .

  A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided at an intermediate position of the game ball passage leading from the payout device 76 to the lower plate 56a, and the detection result of the full tank detection sensor is input to the payout CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the game ball is full when the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and the state where the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor is released. In this case, it is specified that the full state has been released.

  A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided at an intermediate position of the game ball passage leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout CPU 92. The payout-side CPU 92 specifies that the game ball is not detected when the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor. Specifies that the ballless state has been released.

  The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting a game ball paid out from the payout device 76, and a detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout CPU 92. The payout CPU 92 specifies that one payout ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when the payout detection sensor detects a game ball. Further, the payout-side CPU 92 specifies that the payout is abnormal when the payout detection sensor does not continuously detect the game ball, despite the drive control of the payout device 76 so that the game ball is paid out. When the state where the game ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is released, it is specified that the abnormal payout state has been released.

  A front door opening sensor 95 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input to the payout CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a close detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout-side CPU 92 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, and determines when the opening detection signal is received from the front door opening sensor 95. It is specified that the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Further, the payout-side CPU 92 transmits a front door opening command to the main CPU 63 at the timing when the front door frame 14 specifies that the front door frame 14 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the front door frame 14 has changed from the open state to the closed state. At this timing, a front door close command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 has been opened when the front door opening command is received, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is closed when the front door closing command is received.

  A main body opening sensor 96 is provided on the front surface of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the gaming machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the body opening sensor 96 sends an opening detection signal to the payout CPU 92. The payout CPU 92 determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closing state when receiving the opening detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96. It specifies that the main body 12 is in the open state. Further, the payout CPU 92 transmits a main body opening command to the main CPU 63 at a timing that specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at the timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has been opened when the main body opening command is received, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is closed when the main body closing command is received.

  The timer interrupt processing executed by the payout CPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is started repeatedly at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

  First, a full tank process is executed (step S701). In the full tank process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the tank is full based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor. And sends a command indicating that the tank is full to the main CPU 63. When the full state is released, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball is executed, and a command indicating that the full state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  After that, the ball unnecessary process is executed (step S702). In the ball-free process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the ball is in a state without a ball based on the detection result of the ball-absence detection sensor. At the same time as executing the command, a command indicating that there is no ball is transmitted to the main CPU 63. When the absence of ball state is released, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the absence of ball state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  After that, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S703). In the payout abnormality monitoring process, as described above, it is specified whether or not the payout is in an abnormal state based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor. At the same time, a command indicating the abnormal payout state is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the abnormal payout state is released, a process for enabling the payout of the game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the abnormal payout state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a front door opening monitoring process is executed (step S704). In the front door opening monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is open based on the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95, and if the front door frame 14 is open, A process of stopping the payout of game balls is executed, and a front door opening command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the front door frame 14 is closed, a process for enabling payout of game balls is executed, and a front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  After that, the main body opening monitoring process is executed (step S705). In the main body opening monitoring process, as described above, it is specified whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96. The processing for stopping the payout is executed, and the main body release command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. When the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, the processing for enabling the payout of gaming balls is executed, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  After that, a command reading process is executed (step S706). In the command reading process, a process of reading a prize ball command transmitted by the main CPU 63 is executed, and the prize ball command is stored in the payout RAM 94. Then, after executing the prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball number information in the payout RAM 94 (step S707), the payout device 76 pays out the game balls. A payout control process for performing the execution control is executed (step S708). In the payout control process, the drive control of the payout device 76 is performed when the unpaid prize ball number information stored in the payout RAM 94 is 1 or more, and one game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. In this case, the value of the winning ball number information is decremented by one. When the value of the prize ball number information becomes “0”, the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. After that, an external information setting process for controlling the start and the end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed (step S709).

  Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal plate 97. A large number of external terminals are provided on the external terminal plate 97, and some of the external terminals are electrically connected to the main CPU 63 and some of the external terminals. A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout CPU 92. As described above, since the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 are electrically connected to the external terminal board 97, as shown in FIG. It is possible to output.

  One external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the front door opening sensor 95, and one external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the main body opening sensor 96. More specifically, a signal relay board 98 is provided at an intermediate position of a signal path from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout side CPU 92. The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 branched from a signal path SL1 from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL2 is connected to an external terminal for opening the front door of the external terminal plate 97. Therefore, the electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input not only to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the front door opening external terminal of the external terminal board 97. Accordingly, a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in an open state can be output to the hall computer HC without the control of the payout CPU 92.

  More specifically, the main body opening sensor 96 is provided on the signal relay board 98 with a branch path SL4 that branches off from the signal path SL3 from the main body opening sensor 96 to the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal plate 97. Therefore, an electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input not only to the payout side CPU 92 but also to an external terminal for opening the main body in the external terminal board 97. As a result, a signal indicating whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state can be output to the hall computer HC without the control of the payout CPU 92.

  Next, the contents of information externally output from the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 to the hall computer HC will be described. First, the contents of information externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be described.

  In the external information setting process (step S318) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), the main CPU 63 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 on the external terminal board 97. As information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97, information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in progress, information indicating that the support mode is in the high frequency support mode, and one game round has ended. And a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls from the game area PA through the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Information indicating that the game ball has been ejected, information indicating that a game ball has entered the first operating port 33, and information indicating that a game ball has entered the second operating port 34 are included. .

  In the external information setting process (step S709) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17), the payout CPU 92 performs output setting of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout CPU 92 on the external terminal board 97. The information output from the payout-side CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that ten game balls have been paid out.

In accordance with various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97, the hall computer HC can grasp the execution mode of the payout of the game balls in the pachinko machine 10, and the like. For example,
A payout rate, which is a percentage of the number of game balls paid out until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10; a payout rate in an open / close execution mode; Ball rate (hereinafter, this ball rate is referred to as "B")
The payout rate in the open / close execution mode; the payout rate in the high-frequency support mode; ("S")
・ BS × “Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34”
The number of game balls entering the first operation port 33 generated until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “S1”)
The number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 generated until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “S2”)
B- (S1 × “the number of winning balls for winning the first operating port 33” + S2 × “the number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34”)
The occurrence probability of the open / close execution mode per unit game time, the occurrence probability of the high frequency support mode per unit game time, and the like are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible for the hall computer HC to manage the ball entry mode in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10. The number of prize balls is the number of game balls paid out when one game ball enters the corresponding ball entry section.

<Configuration for managing winning modes of gaming balls>
Next, a configuration for managing the game history using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  As described above, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 includes the main CPU 63, the main ROM 64, the main RAM 65, and the management IC 66. In addition, the MPU 62 includes the I / F 101 in addition to the above, and also includes the reading terminal 68d described above.

  The I / F 101 is an interface for transmitting and receiving signals to and from a device external to the MPU 62. The I / F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via the internal bus 103. The detection results from sensors such as the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a and the commands from the payout CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input ports of the I / F 101, and based on the input detection results and the contents of the commands. Various processes are executed by the main CPU 63 as described above. When a signal is output to a device such as a special power drive unit 32b as a result of various processes performed by the main CPU 63, the signal is output through an output port of the I / F 101, and As a result of execution of various processes by the CPU 63, when a command is output to the payout-side CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81, the command is output through an output port of the I / F 101.

  The management IC 66 includes a management I / F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, a history memory 117, a calculation result memory 131, It has. These devices are connected via an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication.

  The management-side I / F 111 receives various signals from the main-side CPU 63 via the one-way communication signal path group 118 built in the MPU 62, and transmits the one-way communication signal path group 119 built in the MPU 62 to the MPU 62. This is an interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 68d through the interface. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to an input port of the management I / F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 68d are output from an output port of the management I / F 111. The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d via a signal path group 120 for bidirectional communication built in the MPU 62.

  The management CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. The management-side ROM 113 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require an external power supply for storing and storing data (that is, a nonvolatile storage unit), and is used as a read-only memory. The management ROM 113 stores various control programs executed by the management CPU 112 and fixed value data. The management-side RAM 114 is a memory such as an SRAM and a DRAM that requires an external power supply for storing and storing data (that is, a volatile storage unit), and is used for both reading and writing. The management-side RAM 114 allows random access, and has a shorter read time than the management-side ROM 113 when compared with the same data capacity. The management-side RAM 114 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the management-side ROM 113 is executed.

  The RTC 115 is a real-time clock that constantly measures date / time information and time information, and outputs the measured date / time information and time information (hereinafter, also referred to as date / time information) according to an instruction from the management CPU 112. It is a configuration that can be used. The RTC 115 is provided with a backup power supply, and can measure the date and time information and the time information even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

  The correspondence memory 116 is a memory such as an SRAM and a DRAM that requires an external power supply for storage and retention (that is, volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence memory 116 stores information on the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p provided at the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p. Used for Details of the contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be described later.

  The history memory 117 is a memory such as a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory which does not require external power supply for storage (that is, non-volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information about the game history received from the main CPU 63 through the management I / F 111. Details of the contents of the history memory 117 will be described later.

  The operation result memory 131 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require an external power supply for storing and holding (that is, a nonvolatile storage unit), and is used for both reading and writing. The calculation result memory 131 is used to sequentially store various parameters calculated by the management-side CPU 112 using the history information stored in the history memory 117. The contents of various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are sequentially displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and are output to an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d.

  Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management-side I / F 111 will be described. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111.

  The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a to 122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p through signal paths 118a to 118p, and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p is a signal to be input. When the signal is at the LOW level, information of "0" is stored as the first data, and when the signal to be input is at the HI level, the information of "1" is stored as the second data. Note that the relationship between the LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

  The first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level first signal when a new game ball is not detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and one game is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. When a ball is detected, a first signal at the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the first signal at the HI level is being input to the first buffer 122a.

  A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level second signal when no new gaming ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and one game is output by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. When a ball is detected, a second signal at the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the second signal at the HI level is being input to the second buffer 122b.

  A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level third signal when no new game ball is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and one game is output by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. When a ball is detected, a third signal at the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the third signal at the HI level is being input to the third buffer 122c.

  The fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special power detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fourth signal in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the special power detection sensor 45a, and when one game ball is detected by the special power detection sensor 45a. And outputs a HI level fourth signal for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level fourth signal is being input to the fourth buffer 122d.

  The fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fifth signal when no new game ball is detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a, and one game is output by the first operation port detection sensor 46a. When a ball is detected, a fifth signal at the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the fifth signal at the HI level is being input to the fifth buffer 122e.

  A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a sixth signal at the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a, and one game is output by the second operation port detection sensor 47a. When a ball is detected, a sixth signal at the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the sixth signal at the HI level is being input to the sixth buffer 122f.

  A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out-mouth detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level seventh signal when no new game ball is detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a, and one game ball is detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a. In this case, the HI-level seventh signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the seventh signal at the HI level is being input to the seventh buffer 122g.

  An eighth signal corresponding to whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress is input to the eighth buffer 122h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level eighth signal in a situation other than the open / close execution mode, and continuously outputs a HI level eighth signal in the situation of the open / close execution mode.

  A ninth signal corresponding to whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in progress is input to the ninth buffer 122i. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW-level ninth signal in a state other than the high-frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the HI-level ninth signal in the state of the high-frequency support mode.

  A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and continues the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is open. And output.

  An eleventh signal corresponding to whether or not the game round has been started is input to the eleventh buffer 122k. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level eleventh signal until the game round is started, and outputs the HI level eleventh signal for a specific period when the game round is started. I do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level eleventh signal is being input to the eleventh buffer 122k.

  A setting value update signal for causing the management-side CPU 112 to recognize that the setting of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set by the main-side CPU 63 is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level set value update signal in a situation where a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has not been performed. And outputs a pulse signal in which the set value update signal of the HI level is maintained for a specific period for a number corresponding to the newly set value. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level set value update signal has been input to the fifteenth buffer 122o.

  In the sixteenth buffer 122p, an output instruction signal for causing the management-side CPU 112 to recognize a trigger for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to the reading terminal 68d is provided. Will be entered. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal when there is no need to output history information, and outputs an HI level output instruction signal for a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. I do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level output instruction signal has been input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

  Although the twelfth buffer 122l, the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the fourteenth buffer 122n can input a signal from the main CPU 63, the pachinko machine 10 is blank in which a normal signal is not input. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, a larger number of buffers 122a to 122p than the types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 are provided as the input ports 121 of the management I / F 111. The management IC 66 can be used for a model different from the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved. Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p so as to correspond one-to-one to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the signal paths 118l to 118n may not be formed between the buffers 122l to 122n to be blanked.

  The input of the set value update signal to the fifteenth buffer 122o and the input of the output instruction signal to the sixteenth buffer 122p have been determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and have received an instruction from the main CPU 63. Instead, the management-side CPU 112 can specify that the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o and that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. On the other hand, what types of signals are input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is not determined in the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are received from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. The details of the identification of these signal types in the management CPU 112 will be described later. Is transmitted by transmitting the type identification command. In this case, the information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116. The information stored in the correspondence memory 116 is referred to.

  FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for describing the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. The correspondence memory 116 has first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in one-to-one correspondence with the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111. Is provided.

  Information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored in the first correspondence area 123a as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a. In addition, in the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31 (10 pieces) together with information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is used. Is stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b by the management-side CPU 112. In addition, in the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating the general winning opening 31 as well as information (10) of the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31. Is stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c by the management-side CPU 112. In addition, in the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31 (10 pieces), together with information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is used. Is stored.

  In the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating the special power winning device 32 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 122d by the management-side CPU 112. In addition, in the fourth correspondence area 123d, information (15) of the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the special power winning device 32 together with information indicating that the device is the special power winning device 32. Is stored. In the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating the first operating port 33 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e. In addition, the fifth correspondence area 123e includes information indicating the first operating port 33 and information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the first operating port 33 (one piece). ) Is also stored. In the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 122f by the management-side CPU 112. Also, in the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the second operation port 34 (1 piece) ) Is also stored. In the seventh correspondence area 123g, information indicating the out port 24a is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

  In the eighth correspondence area 123h, information indicating the open / close execution mode is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h by the management-side CPU 112. In the ninth correspondence area 123i, information indicating the high-frequency support mode is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. In the tenth correspondence area 123j, information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j. In the eleventh correspondence area 123k, information indicating the start of a game round is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k.

  In the twelfth correspondence area 123l, information indicating blanks that do not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l by the management-side CPU 112. In the thirteenth correspondence area 123m, information indicating blanks that do not correspond to any of them is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m. In the fourteenth correspondence area 123n, information indicating blanks that do not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n by the management-side CPU 112.

  As described above, what kind of signal is input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is specified by the management CPU 112 by receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. The management IC 66 can also be used for a model different from the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

  Also, each time a signal corresponding to storage of history information is output to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n, information for recognizing the type of the signal is not output, but the type of the signal is recognized in advance. And information for specifying the type of signal input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n by the management CPU 112 based on the output information is stored in the correspondence memory 116. Configuration. Thus, as compared with a configuration in which the signal for recognizing the type of the signal is output to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n each time the signal corresponding to the storage of the history information is output, the main output of each signal is mainly performed. It is possible to reduce the amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management CPU 112.

  Output of information for specifying the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n by the management-side CPU 112 is performed at the start of supply of operating power. Thereby, in the situation where the game is started in the pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n.

  Further, the information setting that the setting value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o and the information setting that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p are performed in the design stage of the management IC 66. As a result, the setting value update signal and the output instruction signal to be surely used not only by the pachinko machine 10 but also by other types of pachinko machines using the management IC 66, the fifteenth buffer 122o and the sixteenth buffer 122p It is possible to omit the process for specifying the type of signal input to the. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the processing for specifying the type of the signal.

  Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be described. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for describing the configuration of the history memory 117.

  The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are sequentially set, and a history information storage area 125 is set in one-to-one correspondence with each piece of pointer information. The history information storage area 125 can store a combination of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a 2-byte data capacity, a 1-byte data capacity is assigned as an area for storing RTC information, and an area for storing correspondence information. One byte data capacity is allocated. When it is necessary to store correspondence information according to signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n (actually, in the case of the present pachinko machine 10, the first to eleventh buffers 122a to 122k). First, the date and time information measured by the current RTC 115 is stored in an area for storing RTC information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be currently written. After that, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122n that triggered the current information storage is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122n in the correspondence memory 116, and the read correspondence information is read. Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be currently written.

  Regarding the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125, specifically, signals corresponding to the detection results of the ball input detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g as described above. For this reason, information corresponding to the type of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116. More specifically, information corresponding to the types of the incoming ball portions corresponding to each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. In the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a all detect a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 31. In each of the first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the detection sensors 42a to 44a, information indicating that the opening is the general winning opening 31 is stored. The fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating the special power winning device 32, and the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating the first operating port 33. In the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored, and in the seventh correspondence area 123g, information indicating the out port 24a is stored. If the buffers 122a to 122n that triggered the information storage this time are any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of the ball entry section corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122g is The information is read from any of the seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, and the read information of the type of the entering ball portion is stored as it is in the area for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

  On the other hand, a signal indicating whether or not the open / close execution mode is being input to the eighth buffer 122h, a signal indicating whether or not the high frequency support mode is being input to the ninth buffer 122i, and the tenth buffer 122j being input A signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened is input, and a signal indicating whether or not the game round has been started is input to the eleventh buffer 122k. Therefore, information indicating the open / close execution mode is stored in the eighth correspondence area 123h, information indicating the high-frequency support mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and the tenth correspondence area is stored. Information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored in 123j, and information indicating that it is a game time is stored in the eleventh correspondence area 123k.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal at the LOW level in the state other than the open / close execution mode, and continuously outputs the eighth signal at the HI level in the state of the open / close execution mode. The side CPU 112 specifies that the open / close execution mode has been started when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and specifies that the open / close execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It becomes possible. When the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level or when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 generates a trigger for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identify that you have done it. That is, when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the open / close execution mode read out from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the start information together with the history information storage area 125. Is stored in an area for storing the corresponding relationship information. When the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the open / close execution mode read out from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the end information, together with the history information storage area 125. Is stored in an area for storing the corresponding relationship information.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW-level ninth signal in a situation other than the high-frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the HI-level ninth signal in a situation of the high-frequency support mode. When the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the management-side CPU 112 specifies that the high frequency support mode has been started, and when the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, the high frequency support mode ends. Can be specified. When the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the management-side CPU 112 generates a trigger for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identify that you have done it. That is, when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the high-frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the start information is stored together with the history information storage area. 125 are stored in an area for storing the correspondence information. When the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read out from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the end information is stored together with the history information storage area. 125 are stored in the area for storing the correspondence information.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and outputs the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is open. To output continuously, the management-side CPU 112 specifies that the front door frame 14 has been opened when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. Can specify that the front door frame 14 has been closed. When the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level or when the HI level changes to the LOW level, the management-side CPU 112 generates a trigger for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identify that you have done it. That is, when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information is stored together with the history information. It is stored in an area for storing the correspondence information of the area 125. When the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information is stored together with the history information. It is stored in an area for storing the correspondence information of the area 125.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eleventh signal at the LOW level until the timing for starting the game, and when the timing for starting the game is reached, outputs the eleventh signal at the HI level for a specific period. Output a signal. Therefore, the management-side CPU 112 specifies that the game has started when the eleventh signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level. That is, when the eleventh signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the information indicating the game number read out from the eleventh correspondence area 123k is stored in the history information storage area 125 to store the correspondence information. Store in area.

  The history information storage area 125 can store all the history information generated during the ten consecutive business days in which the pachinko machine 10 continuously fires the game balls from opening to closing of the pachinko machine 10. Are provided for several times. For example, if history information is generated 60,000 times in one day, more than 600,000 history information storage areas 125 are provided. As a result, all the history information can be stored and held in the history memory 117 for at least 10 days.

  The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 separately from the history area 124. The pointer area 126 stores information for the management CPU 112 to specify the current pointer information to be written in the history memory 117. Specifically, at the stage of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, information for designating the pointer information “0” as a writing target is set in the pointer area 126. Each time one piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. When the last-ordered pointer information is to be written and the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the last-ordered pointer information, the pointer information is set so that the pointer information of “0” becomes the writing target. The information in the service area 126 is updated. Accordingly, when a history information storage trigger occurs exceeding the number of storable history information, new history information is sequentially overwritten from the history information storage area 125 in which old history information is stored. Become.

  Further, when the history information is read from the history memory 117 by the external device, the history information storage area 125 is all cleared to “0”, and the pointer information of “0” is set as the writing target. The information in the pointer area 126 is updated. This makes it possible to prevent the history information that has once been read from being read again.

  Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the game history using the management IC 66 will be described. First, a description will be given of a processing configuration for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 and the signal type in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a recognition process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the recognition process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 9).

  First, "14" is set to a recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S801). The recognition output counter is a remaining information output for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n of the input port 121 in the management I / F 111 correspond to. Is a counter for specifying the required number of times by the main CPU 63. As described above, since 14 of the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n are to be recognized as signal types, "14" is set in the recognition output counter.

  After that, an output process of the identification start command is executed (step S802). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n correspond to. In outputting this command, first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used. That is, the first to eighth buffers 122a are used by using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) used to instruct the management-side CPU 112 when the storage of the history information is instructed. A command is output for causing the management-side CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal corresponds to .about.122n. Accordingly, the number of signal paths for performing the command output is reduced as compared with a configuration in which signal paths for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p. And the configuration can be simplified. The identification start command has an 8-bit data capacity, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as first to eighth signals, respectively. In the process of outputting the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification start command is started so that the management CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been transmitted. The output period of the identification start command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the ninth signal. Have been. Upon receiving the identification start command, the management-side CPU 112 starts processing for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the signal type in the correspondence memory 116. Identify.

  Thereafter, a type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S803). In this case, the first buffer 122a corresponds to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n so that the signal type is set first, and then the (n + 1) th buffer is set to the signal type after the nth buffer. Recognition setting of the signal type to be performed is performed. Therefore, if the output counter for recognition is "14" to "12", the type identification command indicating the general winning opening 31 and the number of winning balls is read out. The type identification command indicating the device 32 and the number of winning balls is read out. If the output counter for recognition is “10”, the type identification command indicating the first operating port 33 and the number of winning balls is read out. If the output counter for recognition is "9", it is determined that the input port is the second operation port 34 and a type identification command indicating the number of winning balls is read out. If the output counter for recognition is "8", it is the output port 24a. The type identification command is read out, and if the recognition output counter is "7", the type identification command indicating the open / close execution mode is read out. If "6", the type identification command indicating the high frequency support mode is read, and if the recognition output counter is "5", the type identification command indicating the front door frame 14 is read, and the recognition output counter is read. If the value is "4", the type identification command indicating that it is a game time is read, and if the output counter for recognition is "3" to "1", the type identification command indicating that it is blank is read.

  Thereafter, output processing of the read type identification command is executed (step S804). The type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity like the identification start command, and data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as first to eighth signals, respectively. In the output processing of the identification type command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification type command is started so that the management CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been transmitted. The output period of the identification type command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification type command and the ninth signal. Have been. Upon receiving the identification type command, the management-side CPU 112 responds to the identification type command in the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the buffer to be set this time among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n. Store information to be performed.

  Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S805), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the subtraction is “0” (step S806). When the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S806: NO), a process for outputting a type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after subtracting 1 is executed (steps S803 and S803). Step S804).

  On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is “0” (step S806: YES), the output processing of the identification end command is executed (step S807). The identification end command has an 8-bit data capacity, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as first to eighth signals, respectively. In the output processing of the identification end command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification end command is started so that the management-side CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been transmitted. The output period of the identification end command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the ninth signal. Have been. Upon receiving the identification end command, the management-side CPU 112 specifies that the processing for storing the information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the signal type in the correspondence memory 116 has been completed. I do.

  Next, management processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The management process is started when the supply of the operation power to the management CPU 112 is started. The processing speed of the management-side CPU 112 is faster than the processing speed of the main-side CPU 63. After the timer interrupt processing of one time (FIG. 11) is started in the main-side CPU 63, the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) By the time, the combination of the processes from step S908 in the management process is executed 16 times or more.

  First, it is determined whether an identification start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S901). If the identification start command has not been received (step S901: NO), the process returns to step S901 after executing the setting update recognition process (step S902). In the setting update recognition process, when the main CPU 63 sets a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 as will be described in detail later, a corresponding process is executed.

  When the identification start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S901: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S903). The setting target counter is a counter for specifying the types of the buffers 122a to 122n for which the signal types are to be set by the management CPU 112. The first buffer 122a is first set for the signal type, and thereafter the (n + 1) th buffer is set for the signal type after the n-th buffer.

  Thereafter, on condition that the type identification command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S904: YES), a correspondence setting process is executed (step S905). In the correspondence setting processing, the type identification received this time is stored in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the setting target counter of the management-side RAM 114 among the first to fourteenth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123n of the correspondence memory 116. The information of the signal type set in the command is stored. Thereafter, the value of the setting counter of the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S906).

  If a negative determination is made in step S904, or if the process in step S906 is performed, it is determined whether an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S907). If the identification end command has not been received (step S907: NO), the process returns to step S904, and if a new type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S904: YES), the process returns to step S905 and step S906. Execute the process again.

  If the identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S907: YES), the processing of steps S908 to S910 is repeatedly executed. In step S908, a history setting process for storing history information corresponding to the type of the signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117 will be described later. In step S909, although details will be described later, various parameters are calculated using the history information stored in the history memory 117, and the calculation results are reported on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Display output processing for In step S910, an external output process for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 and the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to the reading terminal 68d is executed, which will be described in detail later.

  FIG. 24 is a time chart showing how information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122n is stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. 24A illustrates a period in which a command is output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h). FIG. 24B shows a period in which the output state of the ninth signal is at the HI level. FIG. 24C shows the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122n. FIG. 24D shows a timing at which the correspondence setting process (step S905) is executed by the management-side CPU 112.

  When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. You. Further, at the timing of the time t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at a timing t2 when the output of the identification start command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. The management-side CPU 112 confirms that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, thereby specifying that the command is transmitted from the main-side CPU 63, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. By confirming this information, the contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped. In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management-side CPU 112 enters the identification state by making an affirmative determination in step S901 of the management processing (FIG. 23). Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the output of the identification start command is stopped as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 24A, the output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started. Further, at the timing of the time t4, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing t5 when the output of the type identification command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. The management-side CPU 112 confirms that the command state has been transmitted from the main-side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level. By confirming the information, the contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the management-side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. In the correspondence setting processing, information indicating the general winning opening 31 and information on the number of winning balls are stored in the first correspondence area 123a of the correspondence memory 116. Thereafter, at the timing of t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the timings of t7 to t9, the timings of t10 to t12, the timings of t13 to t15, and the timings of t16 to t18, the main timings are the same as the timings of t4 to t6. A correspondence setting process corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63 is executed by the management CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence setting processing corresponding to the fourteenth type identification command is completed from timing t16 to timing t18.

  Then, at the timing of t19, the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started as shown in FIG. Further, at the timing of the time t19, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at a timing t20 when the output of the identification end command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. The management-side CPU 112 confirms that the command state has been transmitted from the main-side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level. By confirming the information, the contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management-side CPU 112 ends at the timing of t20, as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing of t21, the output of the identification end command is stopped as shown in FIG.

  Since the management CPU 112 recognizes whether or not the command is being output using the ninth signal as described above, it is possible to instruct the management CPU 112 when to store history information. Even if the command is output using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths) to be used, it is clear to the management-side CPU 112 that the command is being output. It becomes possible to make them recognize.

  Next, a processing configuration for storing the history information in the history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a management output process executed by the main CPU 63. The management output process is executed in step S319 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

  First, “11” is set in the management target counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1001). The management target counter specifies in the main CPU 63 whether or not there is a management target that is not a target of specifying whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in the current management output process. In addition, it is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which of the management targets should change the signal output state to the management CPU 112. In one management output process, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed. The management target includes seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, There are a total of eleven of the presence / absence of execution of the opening / closing execution mode, the presence / absence of execution of the high frequency support mode, the presence / absence of opening / closing of the front door frame 14, and the presence / absence of the start of the game round. Therefore, "11" is first set to the management target counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the output state of the signal to the management-side CPU 112 for the management target corresponding to the current value of the management target counter is at the HI level (step S1002). If it is not the HI level (step S1002: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the management target counter is 5 or more. To 48a (step S1003).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, it is determined whether "1" is set in the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the management target counter (step S1004). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is “11” and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether the first output flag is set to “1”, When the value of the management target counter is “10” and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the second output flag, and the value of the management target counter is determined. Is "9" and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not the third output flag is set to "1", and if the value of the management target counter is "8" If it corresponds to the presence / absence detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not the fourth output flag is set to "1", the value of the management target counter is "7", and the first operation port detection sensor 46a , The fifth output flag is set to “1”. It is determined whether or not the sixth output flag is set to “1” when the value of the management target counter is “6” and corresponds to the second working port detection sensor 47a. If the value of the management target counter is “5” and corresponds to the out port 24a, it is determined whether the seventh output flag is set to “1”. As described above, these first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 15).

  If “1” is set in the output flag corresponding to the value of the management target counter (step S1004: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter among the first to seventh signals is set to the HI level. Is set (step S1005). After that, the output flag corresponding to the value of the management target counter is cleared to “0” (step S1006).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1003, it is determined whether or not an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the HI level (step S1007). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is “4”, it is determined whether or not a shift to the open / close execution mode has occurred. It is determined whether or not the shift to the frequency support mode has occurred. If the value of the management target counter is “2”, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 has been opened. When the value is “1”, it is determined whether or not the game round has been started by determining whether or not “1” is set in the eleventh output flag. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1007, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter is set to the HI level (step S1008). When the process of step S1008 is performed when the value of the management target counter is “1”, the eleventh output flag is cleared to “0”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined whether or not an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S1009). Specifically, if the value of the management target counter is 5 or more or “1” and the current management target is any of the incoming ball detection sensors 42 a to 48 a or the start of the game, the first to seventh signals Then, it is determined whether or not the HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter among the eleventh signals is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S908) of the management process (FIG. 23) in the management-side CPU 112, and the output of the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level is performed. This is a period during which the state can be reliably specified by the management-side CPU 112. Further, when the value of the management target counter is “4” and the current management target is the open / close execution mode, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode has ended, and the value of the management target counter is “3”. If the current management target is the high frequency support mode, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode has ended. The value of the management target counter is “2”, and the current management target is the front door frame 14. In this case, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. When the output of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter has been switched to the low level (step S1009: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter is set to the low level (step S1009). Step S1010).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1004, if the processing in step S1006 is performed, if a negative determination is made in step S1007, if the processing in step S1008 is performed, if a negative determination is made in step S1009, or When the process of S1010 is executed, the value of the management target counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1011). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the management target counter after the subtraction of “1” is “0” (step S1012). If the value of the management target counter is 1 or more (step S1012: NO), the processes from step S1002 are executed for the management target corresponding to the new management target counter value.

  Next, the history setting process executed by the management-side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The history setting process is executed in step S908 of the management process (FIG. 23).

  First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is set in a check target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S1101). Specifically, the number of corresponding areas in the first to fourteenth corresponding areas 123a to 123n in the corresponding memory 116 in which information other than the information indicating the blank is stored is specified. Set the number of pieces of information in the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, as described above, since information other than the information indicating blank is stored in the first to eleventh correspondence areas 123a to 123k, "11" is set in the check target counter in step S1101. I do.

  After that, it is checked whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n has been changed from “0” to “1”. Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1102). When the value of the check target counter is “n”, the n-th buffers 122 a to 122 n are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "11", the eleventh buffer 122k is a check target of numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is a check target of numerical information. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, RTC information that is year / month / day information and time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S1103). Then, a writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1104). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current write target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the write target pointer information is specified. The RTC information read in step S1103 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the correspondence information is any one of the information indicating the open / close execution mode, the information indicating the high frequency support mode, and the information indicating the front door frame 14, The start information as well as the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the value of the check target counter is “n”, the n-th correspondence areas 123 a to 123 n are to be read from the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "11", the eleventh correspondence area 123k is a target of reading the correspondence information, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the corresponding relation. It becomes a target of reading information.

  By executing the writing process as described above, the value of the check target counter is changed to one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the game times. , The RTC information, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 33 are stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. The combination of the operating port 34 and the corresponding relationship information indicating that the game port is one of the game times is stored as the history information. When the value of the check target counter is any of the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the RTC information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. In this state, a combination of the opening / closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the correspondence information indicating one of the front door frame 14 and the start information is stored as the history information.

  Thereafter, the target pointer is updated (step S1105). In the update processing, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and added by one. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If it does not exceed the maximum value, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new write target pointer information. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1102, or if the process in step S1105 is performed, it is determined whether the signal output has been switched to the LOW level in the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the check target counter. It is determined whether correspondence information to be checked is stored (step S1106). Specifically, when the current value of the check target counter is “8” to “10”, information indicating the open / close execution mode is displayed in the corresponding correspondence areas 123h to 123j. Since either one of the information indicating the presence and the information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1106.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1106, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is changed from “1” to “0”. It is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the HI level to the LOW level (step S1107). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1107, RTC information is read out in the same manner as in step S1103 (step S1108), and a process of writing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1109). In the writing process, the RTC information read in step S1108 is written to the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, not only the correspondence information but also end information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this manner, when the value of the check target counter is any of the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, it corresponds to the pointer information to be written. The history information storage area 125 stores, as history information, a combination of RTC information, correspondence information indicating one of the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, and end information. It will be in the state that was done. Then, the target pointer is updated as in step S1105 (step S1110).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1106, if a negative determination is made in step S1107, or if the process of step S1110 is performed, the value of the check target counter in the management-side RAM 114 is decremented by one (step S1111). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the subtraction of 1 is “0” (step S1112). If the value of the check target counter is equal to or greater than 1 (step S1112: NO), the processes from step S1102 are executed for the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

  Next, how the history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 27A shows a period in which an HI level signal is being input to one of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g and 122k, and FIG. 27C illustrates a period in which a HI level signal is input to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. 27D illustrates a period in which the HI level signal is input to the tenth buffer 122j. FIG. 27 (e) shows the timing of writing the history information to the history memory 117.

  At the timing of t1, the output state of the signal input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g and 122k is switched from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. Therefore, at the timing of the time t1, the history information is written in the history memory 117 as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing of t2, the signal switched to the HI level at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 27A is switched to the LOW level. However, this signal is a signal that has been input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g and 122k, and the switching of the LOW level is not a target of storing the history information. At the timing, writing of history information is not executed as shown in FIG.

  After that, at the timing of t3, the timing of t5, the timing of t6, the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. The output state of the signal input to any of the 11 buffers 122a to 122g and 122k is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, at each of these timings, history information is written as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h becomes the HI level from the timing t4 to the timing t7. The eighth buffer 122h corresponds to whether or not the open / close execution mode has occurred. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 27 (e), the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to the HI level at timing t4, and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level At each timing of t7, the history information is written. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t4 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing of t7 includes end information. Thus, the execution period of the open / close execution mode can be grasped by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

  Further, history information is written into the history memory 117 in the order of elapse of time. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, or the second operating port 34 is in the open / close execution mode. It is possible to distinguish whether or not. Further, since the history information includes the RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, any one of the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 can be obtained. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered into the open / close execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 27C, the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i becomes the HI level from the timing t8 to the timing t11. The ninth buffer 122i corresponds to whether or not the high-frequency support mode has occurred. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27 (e), the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level At each timing of t11, the history information is written. In this case, the history information written at the timing t8 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing t11 includes end information. Thus, the execution period of the high frequency support mode can be grasped by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

  Further, history information is written into the history memory 117 in the order of elapse of time. Therefore, the history information indicating that a ball has been entered into any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is displayed even in the high frequency support mode. It is possible to distinguish whether or not. In addition, since the history information includes the RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, any one of the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 can be obtained. It is possible to determine whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered is in the high-frequency support mode.

  As shown in FIG. 27D, the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j becomes the HI level from the timing t12 to the timing t15. The tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 27 (e), the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to the HI level is t12, and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. At each timing of t15, the history information is written. In this case, the history information written at the timing t12 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing t15 includes end information. Thus, by confirming the history information in the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the period in which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

  Further, history information is written into the history memory 117 in the order of elapse of time. Therefore, the history information indicating that a ball has been entered into any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is being generated while the front door frame 14 is being opened. Can be distinguished. Further, since the history information includes the RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, any one of the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 can be obtained. It is possible to determine whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered is that the front door frame 14 is being opened.

  Next, an output process of a set value update signal executed when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set by the main CPU 63 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the output processing of the set value update signal executed by the main CPU 63. The output processing of the set value update signal is executed in step S119 in the main processing (FIG. 9).

  A value corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is set in a pulse number counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1201). Specifically, the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is set to the pulse number counter. Thereafter, it is determined whether the set value update signal directed to the management CPU 112 is at the HI level (step S1202). As described above, the set value update signal has been input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 of the management IC 66. Here, the output process of the set value update signal is a process for causing the management CPU 112 to specify the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n of the input port 121 in the main process (FIG. 9). It is executed at a timing before a certain recognition process. On the other hand, the input of the set value update signal to the fifteenth buffer 122o is set in the management IC 66 at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, so that the output of the set value update signal is performed before the recognition process. Even if the processing is executed, the management-side CPU 112 can specify that the signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is the set value update signal.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1202, the value of the LOW level counter provided in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1203). Is determined (step S1204). The LOW level counter is a counter for specifying by the main CPU 63 whether or not the set value update signal is maintained at the LOW level for a predetermined period while outputting a plurality of pulses at which the set value update signal becomes HI level. It is. When the value of the LOW level counter is “0” (step S1204: YES), it means that it is time to set the set value update signal to the HI level, and thus the set value update signal is set to the HI level. It is set (step S1205).

  Thereafter, “20” is set to the HI level counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1206). The HI level counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify a period during which the set value update signal is maintained at the HI level. Since the value set in the HI level counter is decremented by 1 at a period of about 10 microseconds, the output of the set value update signal is maintained at the HI level for 200 microseconds when one pulse is output. The HI level maintenance period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the set value update signal has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

  If the set value update signal is at the HI level (step S1202: YES), the value of the HI level counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1207), and the value of the HI level counter after the subtraction is set to "0". It is determined whether or not it is set (step S1208). If the value of the HI level counter is “0” (step S1208: YES), it means that it is time to set the set value update signal to the LOW level, so that the set value update signal is set to the LOW level. It is set (step S1209).

  Thereafter, the value of the pulse number counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1210), and it is determined whether or not the value of the pulse number counter after the subtraction is "0" (step S1211). If the value of the pulse number counter is not "0" (step S1211: NO), the output of the pulse signals by the set value update signals for the number corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time has been completed. In order to mean that there is no data, "20" is set to the LOW level counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1212). Since the value set in the LOW level counter is decremented by 1 in a cycle of about 10 microseconds, the value is maintained at the LOW level for 200 microseconds between a plurality of pulse outputs by the set value update signal. The LOW level maintenance period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the set value update signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level.

  When the value of the pulse number counter is “0” (step S1211: YES), the output of the pulse signals by the set value update signals corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is completed. Therefore, the output process of the set value identification end command is executed (step S1213). The set value identification end command is a command for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output of the set value update signal for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is completed. When outputting the set value identification end command, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used similarly to the identification start command, the type identification command, and the identification end command. However, the signal pattern of the set value identification end command is different from the identification start command, type identification command, and identification end command.

  As described above, in the output processing of the set value update signal, a pulse signal of the set value update signal corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set at the start of the supply of the operating power this time is output to the management IC 66. I do. By executing the setting update recognition process, the management-side CPU 112 grasps the number of pulse signals due to the set value update signal, and grasps the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time based on the number.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a setting update recognition process executed by the management CPU 112. The setting update recognition process is executed in step S902 of the management process (FIG. 23).

  It is determined whether the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1301). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, the value of the set value grasp counter provided in the management-side RAM 114 is set to "1" (step S1302). The set value grasp counter is a counter for specifying the set value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management CPU 112. For example, if the value of the set value grasp counter is "1", it means "setting 1". If the value of the set value grasp counter is “6”, it means “set 6”.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S1303). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, the value of the set value grasp counter of the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1304). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1303, or if the process of step S1304 is performed, based on the input state of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. It is determined whether a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1305). If a negative determination is made in step S1305, the process returns to step S1303.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1305, RTC information that is year / month / day information and time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S1306). Then, a writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1307). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current write target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the write target pointer information is specified. The RTC information read in step S1306 is written to the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both the information for identifying the setting value and the information of the value of the setting value grasp counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting has been performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting has been performed are included. The combination is stored as history information.

  After that, the target pointer is updated (step S1308). In the update processing, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and added by one. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If it does not exceed the maximum value, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new write target pointer information. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  When the setting update recognition process is executed as described above, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the setting is performed, the date and time when the setting is performed, and the The combination of the set values when the setting is made is stored in the history area 124 as history information. Thus, by reading and analyzing the information stored in the history memory 117 using an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, the date and time when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and the setting are changed. It is possible to grasp the contents of the set value when the setting is performed.

  Here, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the information stored in the history memory 117 is maintained as it is. As a result, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, it is possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being erased, and various parameters to be described later are changed when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. Is calculated using history information that exists across the front and back of. In this case, since the date and time when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set as described above is stored in the history memory 117, the external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d and stored in the history memory 117. By reading the information, it becomes possible to calculate various parameters after the timing when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and during the period when the setting state is maintained.

  Next, the display output processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The display output process is executed in step S909 of the management process (FIG. 23).

  First, it is determined whether it is the operation timing (step S1401). If 51 seconds have elapsed since the start of the supply of the operating power to the management-side CPU 112, or if 51 seconds have elapsed since the previous affirmative determination in step S1401, an affirmative determination is made in step S1401. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the various numbers of entering balls at normal times are calculated (step S1402). Specifically, first, the number of the history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the out port 24a is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is counted, so that the number of the out port 24a is counted. Calculate the number of incoming balls. Further, by counting the number of the history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the ball is entered into the general winning opening 31. Calculate the number. Also, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 in which the correspondence information indicating that the device is the special prize winning device 32 is stored, the ball is entered into the special prize winning device 32. Calculate the number. Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the first operation port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the number of the first operation port 33 is increased. Calculate the number of incoming balls. Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, Calculate the number of incoming balls.

  Thereafter, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and start information are stored, and a correspondence relationship indicating the front door frame 14. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in a period between the information and the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, an out port generated in a state where the front door frame 14 is in the open state is referred to. 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34, the number of balls entering each is calculated (step S1403). In a history area 124 of the history memory 117, a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and start information are stored, and correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and The period from the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entirety of the pointer information that is a serial number, a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and start information are stored, and a correspondence relationship indicating the front door frame 14. When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the number of entering balls for the total of the sections is calculated. Further, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the front door frame 14 is present and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is present. If the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the end information are not stored in the history information storage area 125 in which is stored, the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored. The history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the stored history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as if the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1402 and S1403 (step S1404). Specifically, first, the number of incoming balls calculated during the opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1403 is subtracted from the number of incoming balls calculated in step S1402. Then, the following first to eighth parameters are calculated using the respective numbers of entered balls after the subtraction. Note that the difference between the number of balls in the out port 24a calculated in step S1402 and the number of balls in the out port 24a calculated in step S1403 is defined as the number of incoming balls K1, and the number of balls in the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1402 is calculated. The difference between the number of balls in the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of balls K2, and the special prize winning device calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of balls in the special prize device 32 calculated in step S1402. The difference in the number of incoming balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of incoming balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1402 is the incoming ball. The number K4 is set as the number K4, and the second number calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of entering balls of the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1402. The difference between the ball entrance number of Doguchi 34 and ball entrance number K5.
First parameter: total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “number of prize balls for prize to general prize port 31” + K3 × “number of prize balls for prize to special electric prize device 32” + K4 × “first operation port” 33) + K5 × “the number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34” / the ratio of the total number of game balls ejected from the skill area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as the ratio). "D1")
2nd parameter: ratio of total number K2 of game balls entering general winning opening 31 / total number of game balls ejected from game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) Third parameter: game balls to special power winning device 32 Ratio of the total number of game balls K3 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) .Fourth parameter: the total number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 K4 / the discharge from the game area PA. Of the total number of game balls (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D2")
Fifth parameter: the ratio of the total number K5 of game balls entering the second operation port 34 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D3").
Sixth parameter: D1− (D2 × “the number of winning balls for winning the first operating port 33” + D3 × “the number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34”)
Seventh parameter: (K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special power winning device 32” + K5 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / total payout number of game balls (K2 × “general” Number of prize balls for winning in the winning opening 31 "+ K3 ×" Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32 "+ K4 ×" Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating opening 33 "+ K5 ×" Second operating opening 34 Eighth parameter: K3 × “the number of prize balls for winning to the special electric prize device 32” / the total number of game balls paid out (K2 × “the winning number to the general winning opening 31”) Number of prize balls ”+ K3 ד Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32 ”+ K4 ד Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33 ”+ K5 ד Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34 ” )) Ratio Step S1404 Which stores the first to eighth parameter is the operation result to the normal storage area for the time of the operation result memory 131. The first to eighth parameters stored in the normal storage area are stored and held until the next step S1404 is executed. In other words, when the next step S1404 is executed and the first to eighth parameters are calculated, the newly calculated first to eighth parameters are stored in the normal-time storage area. Up to this time, the previous calculation results of the first to eighth parameters stored in the normal time storage area are overwritten.

  After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating the open / close execution mode and the start information, the correspondence information indicating the open / close execution mode, and the like. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the end information and the history information storage area 125, the out port 24a and the general prize port 31 generated in the open / close execution mode are referred to. Then, the number of balls entering each of the special electric winning device 32, the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34 is calculated (step S1405). In a history area 124 of the history memory 117, a history information storage area 125 storing correspondence information and start information indicating the open / close execution mode, and correspondence information and end information indicating the open / close execution mode. Is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entirety of the pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the open / close execution mode and the start information are stored, the correspondence information indicating the open / close execution mode, and When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the number of incoming balls for the total of the sections is calculated. In addition, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the opening / closing execution mode and the start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored. If the stored history information storage area 125 does not store the correspondence information indicating the open / close execution mode and the end information, the correspondence information indicating the open / close execution mode and the start information are stored. Any history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is handled in the open / close execution mode.

  Thereafter, during the period of the opening / closing execution mode specified in step S1405, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the outgoing port 24a, which occur when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. The number of balls entering each of the second operation ports 34 is calculated (step S1406). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as that of step S1403 except that the period of the open / close execution mode specified in step S1405 is assumed.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1405 and S1406 (step S1407). Specifically, first, the number of incoming balls generated during opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1406 is subtracted from the number of incoming balls calculated in step S1405. Then, the following eleventh to eighteenth parameters are calculated using the respective numbers of entered balls after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls in the out-opening 24a calculated in step S1405 and the number of balls in the out-opening 24a calculated in step S1406 is defined as the number of incoming balls K11, and the number of balls in the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1405 is calculated. The difference between the number of balls in the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of balls K12, and the special prize winning device calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of balls in the special prize device 32 calculated in step S1405. The difference between the number of incoming balls of 32 is the number of incoming balls K13, and the difference between the number of incoming balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1406 and the number of incoming balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1405 is entered. In step S1406, the number K14 is set as the number K14 and the number of balls in the second working port 34 calculated in step S1405. The difference between the ball entrance number of the second actuating port 34 and ball entrance number K15 was.
Eleventh parameter: the total number of game balls to be paid out (K12 × “the number of prize balls for winning into the general winning opening 31” + K13 × “the number of prize balls for winning to the special electric winning device 32” + K14 × “the first operating port 33” + K15 × “Number of prize balls for winning to the second operating port 34”) / Ratio of the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “ D11 ”)
The twelfth parameter: the ratio of the total number K12 of game balls to the general winning opening 31 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15). The thirteenth parameter: the game balls to the special prize device 32. Ratio of the total number of game balls K13 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15). Fourteenth parameter: the total number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 K14 / the discharge from the game area PA. Of the total number of game balls (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D12")
A fifteenth parameter: a ratio of the total number K15 of game balls entering the second operation port 34 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D13”)
Sixteenth parameter: D11− (D12 × “the number of winning balls for winning the first operating port 33” + D13 × “the number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34”)
Seventeenth parameter: (K13 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special power winning device 32” + K15 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / the total payout number of game balls (K12 × “general” Number of prize balls for winning in the winning opening 31 "+ K13 ×" Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32 "+ K14 ×" Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating opening 33 "+ K15 ×" Second operating opening 34. 18th parameter: K13 × “Number of prize balls for prize to special electric prize device 32” / total number of game balls paid out (K12 × “for prize to general prize port 31”) "Number of prize balls" + K13 x "number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34"") In step S1407, the first to eighteenth parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the open / close execution mode storage area of the calculation result memory 131. The first to eighteenth parameters stored in the open / close execution mode storage area are stored and held until the next step S1407 is executed. In other words, when the next step S1407 is executed to calculate the 11th to 18th parameters, the newly calculated 11th to 18th parameters are stored in the open / close execution mode storage area. Then, the previous calculation results of the first to eighteenth parameters stored in the opening / closing execution mode storage area are overwritten.

  Thereafter, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the correspondence information indicating the high-frequency support mode and the history information storage area 125 storing the start information, and the correspondence indicating the high-frequency support mode. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the information and the end information stored in the history information storage area 125, the out port 24a generated in the high frequency support mode, The number of balls entered into each of the winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is calculated (step S1408). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and start information are stored, and correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode. The period from the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entirety of the pointer information that is the serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored, and the correspondence indicating the high frequency support mode. When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the number of entering balls for the total of the sections is calculated. In addition, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is present. Is stored in the history information storage area 125 where the high frequency support mode is not stored, and the corresponding relationship information and the start information indicating the high frequency support mode are stored. The history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the stored history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as that in the high frequency support mode.

  Thereafter, during the period of the high-frequency support mode specified in step S1408, the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special winning opening device 32, and the first operating opening 33 generated when the front door frame 14 is open. Then, the number of balls entering each of the second operation ports 34 is calculated (step S1409). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as that in step S1403 except that the period of the high frequency support mode specified in step S1408 is assumed.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1408 and S1409 (step S1410). Specifically, first, the number of incoming balls generated during opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1409 is subtracted from the number of incoming balls calculated in step S1408. Then, the following 21st to 26th parameters are calculated using the numbers of each ball after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls in the out port 24a calculated in step S1408 and the number of balls in the out port 24a calculated in step S1409 is referred to as the number of balls K21, and the number of balls in the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1408. The difference between the number of balls in the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of balls K22, and the special prize winning device calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of balls in the special prize device 32 calculated in step S1408. The difference between the number of incoming balls of 32 is the number of incoming balls K23, and the difference between the number of incoming balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1409 and the number of incoming balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1408 is entered. In step S1409, the number is set to K24, and the number of balls in the second working port 34 calculated in step S1408 is calculated in step S1409. The difference between the ball entrance number of the second actuating port 34 and ball entrance number K25 was.
21st parameter: total payout number of game balls (K22 × “number of prize balls for winning to general prize port 31” + K23 × “number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize device 32” + K24 × “first operating port 33” + K25 × “Number of prize balls for winning to the second operating port 34”) / the ratio of the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “ D11 ”)
22nd parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls K22 to the general winning opening 31 / total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25). 23rd parameter: game balls to the special prize winning device 32. Ratio of the total number of game balls K23 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25). Twenty-fourth parameter: the total number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 K24 / the discharge from the game area PA. Of the total number of game balls (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D22")
• Twenty-fifth parameter: the ratio of the total number K25 of game balls entering the second operation port 34 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D23").
26th parameter: D21− (D22 × “the number of winning balls for winning the first operating port 33” + D23 × “the number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34”)
In step S1410, the 21st to 26th parameters, which are the operation results, are stored in the high-frequency support mode storage area of the operation result memory 131. The 21st to 26th parameters stored in the high frequency support mode storage area are stored and held until the next step S1410 is executed. In other words, when the next step S1410 is executed and the 21st to 26th parameters are calculated, the newly calculated 21st to 26th parameters are stored in the high-frequency support mode storage area. Thus, the previous calculation results of the 21st to 26th parameters previously stored in the high frequency support mode storage area are overwritten.

Thereafter, the frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode is calculated and stored (step S1411). Specifically, by counting the number of the history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the open / close execution mode and the start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the open / close execution mode is counted. Is calculated. Further, the number of occurrences of the game times is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 in which the correspondence information indicating the start of the game times is stored. . Then, the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit game time is calculated. Note that the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode is referred to as the number of occurrences K31, and the number of occurrences of the game times is referred to as the number of occurrences K32.
31st parameter: K31 / K32
In step S1411, the 31st parameter, which is the calculation result, is stored in the open / close execution mode frequency storage area in the calculation result memory 131. The 31st parameter stored in the open / close execution mode frequency storage area is stored and held until the next step S1411 is executed. In other words, when the next step S1411 is executed and the 31st parameter is calculated, the newly calculated 31st parameter is stored in the opening / closing execution mode frequency storage area, so that the opening / closing execution mode is not changed until then. The previous calculation result of the 31st parameter stored in the frequency storage area is overwritten.

Thereafter, the frequency of occurrence of the high frequency support mode is calculated and stored (step S1412). Specifically, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, by counting the number of the history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high-frequency support mode and the start information are stored, Calculate the number of occurrences of support mode. Further, the number of occurrences of the game times is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 in which the correspondence information indicating the start of the game times is stored. . Then, the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode per unit game time and the ratio of the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode to the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode are calculated. The number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode is set to the number of occurrences K41, the number of occurrences of the game times is set to the number of occurrences K42, and the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode calculated in step S1411 is set to the number of occurrences K43.
-41st parameter: K41 / K42
-42nd parameter: K41 / K43
In step S1412, the 41st to 42nd parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the high-frequency support mode frequency storage area in the calculation result memory 131. The 41st to 42nd parameters stored in the high-frequency support mode frequency storage area are stored and held until the next step S1412 is executed. That is, when the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated by executing the next step S1412, the newly calculated 41st to 42nd parameters are stored in the high-frequency support mode frequency storage area. Thus, the previous calculation results of the 41st to 42nd parameters stored in the high-frequency support mode frequency storage area are overwritten.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1401, or when the process of step S1412 is performed, a display process is performed (step S1413). FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the display processing.

  First, the value of the update timing counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S1501). The update timing counter is a counter for specifying by the management-side CPU 112 that it is time to update the display contents of the management result of the game history on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The management-side CPU 112 controls the display of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c to thereby control the first to eighth parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, and the 31st parameter. The parameter and the calculation results of the 41st to 42nd parameters are reported. In this case, the information corresponding to the type of the parameter to be notified is displayed on the first notification display device 69a. Also, of the value obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100, the number corresponding to the tens place is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, and the number corresponding to the ones place is displayed on the third notification display. It is displayed on the device 69c. In the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the first to eighth parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter, and the 41st to 41st parameters The display corresponding to the calculation result of the forty-second parameter is sequentially switched according to a predetermined order, and after the calculation result of the forty-second parameter, which is the display object of the last order, is displayed, the display object of the first order is displayed. The calculation result of one parameter is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds.

  Here, the calculation cycle of the various parameters in the management CPU 112 is 51 seconds. On the other hand, the number of various parameters is 25, and the period in which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds. Therefore, the various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 are displayed at least once on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  When the process of step S1501 is executed, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are updated by determining whether or not the value of the update timing counter after subtracting 1 is "0". It is determined whether or not it is time to perform (step S1502). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, the value of the display target counter provided in the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1503). If the value of the display target counter after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value “24” (step S1504: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to “0” (step S1505).

  The display target counter is a counter for specifying the type of parameter to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c by the management CPU 112. The first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, the fourteenth to forty-second parameters, and the display target counters “0” to “24” The possible values correspond one-to-one. For example, when the value of the display target counter is “0”, the first parameter to be displayed first is the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the value of the display target counter is “24”. In the case of, the 42nd parameter which is the last display target is the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1504, or if the process of step S1505 is performed, the first notification display device 69a is displayed so that information corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is displayed. It controls (step S1506). In addition, a parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read from the calculation result memory 131, the read parameter is multiplied by 100, and a number corresponding to the tens place is displayed on the second notification display device 69b. The number corresponding to the ones digit is displayed on the third notification display device 69c (step S1507). The contents displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c in steps S1506 and S1507 are continued until the next update timing or until the supply of the operating power to the management CPU 112 is stopped. You. Thereafter, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set as a value corresponding to the next update timing in the update timing counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S1508).

  When the supply of the operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is started by executing the display processing as described above, the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Is done. The display of the management result of the game history is performed irrespective of whether the game is continued or not, and the main control device 60 is opened from the front of the pachinko machine 10 by opening the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. This is performed regardless of whether it is visible. As described above, the display control of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is performed regardless of the state of the game and the state of the pachinko machine 10, thereby the first to third notification display devices 69a. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of .about.69c.

  The display of the management result of the game history on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is started after the supply of the operation power to the management CPU 112 is started and after the identification end command is received from the main CPU 63. Is done. In this case, similarly to the information stored in the history memory 117, the information stored in the operation result memory 131 is stored and held even when the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. Therefore, when the supply of the operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is started, the management result of the game history calculated before the supply of the operation power to the management-side CPU 112 is stopped is displayed.

  When the setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, information corresponding to the set value being changed is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. That is, the information corresponding to the set value is displayed before the identification end command is transmitted from the main CPU 63, whereas the game history on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is displayed. Is started after the main CPU 63 transmits the identification end command. Accordingly, even when the third notification display device 69c is configured to also serve as a display device for displaying information corresponding to the set value and displaying a management result of the game history, the display of these displays is performed. Periods can be prevented from overlapping.

  When the information corresponding to the set value is displayed, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are not displayed. On the other hand, when the management result of the game history is displayed, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are not hidden. This makes it possible to identify which of the display of the information corresponding to the set value and the display of the management result of the game history is performed on the third notification display device 69c.

  Next, a processing configuration for outputting history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the operation result memory 131 to an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d of the MPU 62. explain. FIG. 32A is a flowchart showing a data output process executed by the main CPU 63. The data output process is executed in step S112 in the main process (FIG. 9).

  In the data output processing, first, it is determined whether or not a connection signal indicating that an external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d is received from the reading terminal 68d (step S1601). If a negative determination is made in step S1601, the present data output process ends. In this case, it is necessary to restart the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 in order to execute the data output processing. Thereby, in order to externally output the history information and various parameters, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. Need to be A power switch for performing a stop operation and a start operation of supplying the operating power to the main CPU 63 is provided in the dispensing mechanism 73 mounted on the back of the back pack unit 15. To do so, it is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 to expose the back surface of the back pack unit 15. In such a situation, in order to externally output the history information and various parameters, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. By adopting a configuration in which it is necessary to perform the operation for reading the history information and various parameters, even if a person other than the administrator of the gaming hall tries to perform the operation, it is possible to make it difficult.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, it is determined whether or not a control information confirmation signal has been received from the reading terminal 68d. It is determined whether or not the control information (program and data) is checked (step S1602). The external device is configured to be able to perform both the confirmation of the control information and the confirmation of the history information and various parameters. A signal for control information confirmation is transmitted, and when confirmation of history information and various parameters is selected by manual operation on the external device, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the external device. The configuration is not limited to this, and the external device for confirming control information and the external device for confirming history may be different. In this case, if an external device for control information confirmation is electrically connected to the read terminal 68d, a signal for control information confirmation is transmitted from the external device, and an external device for history confirmation is transmitted to the read terminal 68d. When the device is electrically connected, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the external device.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, an output process for confirming control information is executed (step S1603). In the output process, a program and data are read as control information from the main ROM 64, and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 68d. As a result, the control information can be read by an external device that is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and whether the control information is correct or not is checked. Can be performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1602, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management CPU 112 (step S1604). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI level output state is continued for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level output instruction signal has been input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. When the output state of the output instruction signal is switched to the HI level, the management-side CPU 112 executes processing for outputting history information.

  Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32B, the management-side CPU 112 switches the output state of the output instruction signal input to the sixteenth buffer 122p of the input port 121 from the LOW level to the HI level. (Step S1701: YES), the history information stored in the history memory 117 and the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are read, and the read history information and various parameters are output to the reading terminal 68d. (Step S1702). As a result, history information and various parameters can be read by an external device that is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and information on the management result of the game history can be analyzed. In addition, when the management-side CPU 112 outputs the history information to the reading terminal 68d, the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" (step S1703). The history information in the history memory 117 is deleted only when the history information is read by the external device.

  Returning to the description of the data output processing (FIG. 32A), when the processing of step S1603 or the processing of step S1604 is performed, the electrical connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is continued. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S1605). If continued (step S1605: YES), the process stands by at step S1605. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing set in the execution order subsequent to the data output processing from being executed until the connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is released. When the connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is released (step S1605: NO), the data output processing ends.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  When a game ball enters any one of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, the game ball is paid out. The game is played while expecting the game ball to enter the ball. In this configuration, a game ball enters any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (hereinafter, also referred to as a history target input section). Occurs, the corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. This allows the pachinko machine 10 to store and hold information for managing the number or frequency of game balls entering each history target entry section, and uses the managed information. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the manner in which game balls enter each history target entry section. In addition, since the history information is stored and held by the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification.

  All the ball entry sections for ejecting game balls from the game area PA are subjected to storage processing of the history information and are also managed using the history information. As a result, it is possible to manage the ball entry frequency for an arbitrary history target entry section using the history information. In addition, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering each history target ball entry unit to the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA using the history information.

  The history information includes RTC information that is information corresponding to the timing at which a game ball entered the history target entry section that triggered the storage of the history information. Thus, by using the history information, it is possible to grasp in detail the ball entry history of the game ball into the entry target ball entry unit.

  In the history memory 117, not only history information corresponding to a game ball having entered the history target ball entry unit, but also history information indicating whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is being performed, and the high frequency support mode. History information indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened is stored. This makes it possible to manage the state of entry of game balls into the history entry section, distinguishing whether or not each of these situations.

  The history information stored in the history memory 117 can be output to an external device that is an external device of the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to read the history information with the external device and analyze the manner in which the game balls enter the history target entry section using the read history information.

  The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 68d, and a program can be read from the main ROM 64 by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not the program is normal. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is externally output using the reading terminal 68d for externally outputting the program. This makes it possible to externally output the history information while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

  The information to be output from the reading terminal 68d is specified as either the program or the history information, and the information corresponding to the specified result is externally output through the reading terminal 68d. Thus, in a configuration in which the history information is externally output using the reading terminal 68d for externally outputting the program, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether the information to be externally output is the program or the history information. Side, and the specified information is output to the outside. Therefore, even when the reading terminal 68d is also used, only necessary information can be read.

  Based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, it is specified which of the program and the history information the information to be output from the reading terminal 68d is. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration for selecting information to be output from the outside from becoming complicated.

  An MPU 62 having a main ROM 64 that stores a program in advance has a management IC 66 and a reading terminal 68d. As a result, the signal paths for the reading terminal 68d can be integrated in the MPU 62. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the above-described excellent effects while making it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the signal path to the reading terminal 68d.

  A main CPU 63 that executes processing for paying out game balls based on the entry of game balls into any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. In addition, a management CPU 112 is provided, and the management CPU 112 executes processing for storing history information in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to manage the manner in which game balls enter each history target entry section while preventing the processing load on the main CPU 63 from being extremely increased.

  The main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 are provided on the same chip as the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

  The main-side CPU 63 transmits information corresponding to the detection results of the ball-in detection sensors 42a to 48a to each buffer of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 by using signal paths corresponding to each of the ball-in detection sensors 42a to 48a. It transmits to 122a-122g. As a result, the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 corresponds to each of the buffers 122a to 122g (that is, each signal path), and the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management CPU 112 is simplified. It is possible to do.

  The main CPU 63 has information corresponding to whether the open / close execution mode is being performed, information corresponding to whether the high frequency support mode is being performed, information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is being opened, Then, information corresponding to the start of the game round is transmitted to each of the buffers 122h to 122k of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 by using signal paths corresponding to each of these situations. As a result, the types of information corresponding to these situations correspond to the buffers 122h to 122k (that is, the respective signal paths), and the configuration for distinguishing the types of information in the management-side CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible.

  The main CPU 63 transmits to the management CPU 112 correspondence information indicating which type of information the buffers 122a to 122k (that is, the signal paths 118a to 118k) correspond to. This eliminates the need to store the correspondence information in the management IC 66 in advance. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

  When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Thereby, in a situation where a game ball can enter the history target ball entry unit, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history target ball entry unit can be specified by the management IC 66. It becomes possible to become.

  Correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 using signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating the presence or absence of a game ball in the history entry section. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with a configuration in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting the correspondence information is provided.

  The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116, and the correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. Thereby, every time the main CPU 63 transmits information on the detection results of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, the information enabling the management target IC 66 to specify the history entry ball entry portion corresponding to the information to be transmitted is transmitted. No need to provide. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the detection result of each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main CPU 63.

  When the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information is output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 68d. In this case, the fact that the signal path corresponding to the sixteenth buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal can be specified by the management CPU 112 without receiving the correspondence information from the main CPU 63. . This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the transmission of the correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

  The management IC 66 is provided with a larger number of buffers than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 as buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63. Have been. Accordingly, even when the number of types of the information increases or decreases according to the type of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to cope without changing the configuration regarding the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

  When the history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 68d, each piece of history information includes correspondence information indicating the type of the history target ball entry unit corresponding to the history information. This makes it possible to specify the manner in which game balls enter the respective target ball entry sections, using the read history information.

  By using the history information stored in the history memory 117 in the management IC 66, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, eleventh parameter, 18th parameter, 21st to 26th parameter, 31st parameter, 41st to 42nd parameter) are calculated. Then, various parameters of the calculated results are sequentially displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. This allows the pachinko machine 10 to notify the pachinko machine 10 of various parameters obtained as a result of the calculation using the history information.

  Various parameters are calculated with the history information corresponding to the situation where the front door frame 14 is being opened excluded. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. Further, various parameters corresponding to the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to grasp the state of entering the game ball according to each situation.

  When the history information of the history memory 117 is output to the external device, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing the clearing process of the history memory 117. As a result, the history information that exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 117 is to be stored in the history memory 117, and the history information that should be stored and retained is erased by overwriting. Is less likely to occur.

  In a configuration in which when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, an external output corresponding thereto is performed through the external terminal plate 97, and the history information is stored in the history memory 117. . Thus, the history and the number of game balls entering the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 can be easily grasped by utilizing the information output externally through the external terminal plate 97, and the history is obtained. By using the history information stored in the memory for use 117, it is possible to accurately grasp the number and frequency of game balls entering the history target entry section.

  The probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode fluctuates according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. This makes it possible to generate a situation where even a single pachinko machine 10 is advantageous or disadvantageous in the probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode fluctuates according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, while the probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode is set in the pachinko machine 10. Does not change according to the state. This makes it possible to limit the influence of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 on the probability of the jackpot result to the situation in the low probability mode. Further, since the high probability table 64g referred to in the high probability mode can be made common regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the probability table 64a to 64g is previously stored in the main ROM 64. It is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity for storing.

  The probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode fluctuates according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, while the distribution mode of the type of the jackpot result is changed to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Does not fluctuate accordingly. This makes it possible to limit the influence of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 to the situation in the low probability mode. In addition, since the distribution table 64h referred to when allocating the type of the jackpot result can be made common regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the distribution table 64h in the main ROM 64 is used. Can be suppressed from increasing the storage capacity for pre-storing.

  Even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is stored without being erased. As a result, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, it is possible to continuously store the history information up to that time in the history memory 117, and the history memory 117 can be stored for a long period of time. The management result of the game history can be specified using the history information accumulated in 117.

  Even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, in a configuration in which the history information stored in the history memory 117 is stored and held without being erased, a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Is performed, the corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to distinguish between the history information before the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 and the history information after the new setting.

  When history information corresponding to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly stored in the history memory 117, information corresponding to the set value is included in the history information. This makes it possible to specify the contents of the setting values set in the past by referring to the history information.

  When various parameters are calculated at the calculation timing, the history information corresponding to the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117 is used as a reference, and the history information stored after that is used. Then, various parameters may be calculated. In this case, it is possible to derive the management result of the game history at the timing after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set as various parameters.

  In the case where various parameters are calculated at the calculation timing, the history information corresponding to the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117 and the history information corresponding to the change of the set value is used as a reference. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that various parameters are calculated using history information stored after that. In this case, the management result of the game history at the timing after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been changed can be derived as various parameters.

  Further, although the opening for exposing the reading terminal 68d is provided in the board box 60a of the main control device 60, the opening is not provided, and the reading terminal 69d is provided on the opposing wall 60b. It is good also as composition covered with. In this case, it is necessary to open the substrate box 60a in order to connect an external device to the reading terminal 68d.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the hit / fail table corresponding to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main ROM 64 in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in the main ROM 64, a setting 1 area 161, a setting 2 area 162, a setting 3 area 163, a setting 4 area 164, a setting 5 area 165, and a setting 6 area 166 are provided. The setting 1 area 161 includes a low-accuracy winning / failing table 161a for setting 1 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1” and the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode. Is stored in the case where the setting state is “Setting 1” and the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode. The setting 2 area 162 includes a low-accuracy winning / failing table 162a for setting 2, which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2” and the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode. Is stored in the setting state of “setting 2” and the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode. The setting 3 area 163 includes a low-accuracy winning / failing table 163a for setting 3 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 3” and the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode. Is stored in the setting state of “setting 3”, and the high-accuracy winning / failing table 163b for setting 3 which is referred to when the winning / lottery mode is the high probability mode.

  The setting 4 area 164 includes a low-probability table 164a for setting 4, which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 4” and the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode. Is stored in the setting state of “Setting 4”, and the high-probability determination table 164b for setting 4 that is referred to when the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode. The setting 5 area 165 includes a low-probability table 165a for setting 5, which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 5” and the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode. Is stored in the setting state of “setting 5”, and the high-probability determination table 165b for setting 5 which is referred to when the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode. The setting 6 area 166 includes a low-probability table 166a for setting 6, which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 6" and the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode. Is stored in the case of the “setting 6” and the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode.

  The winning probabilities of the jackpot results set in each of the low-probability tables 161a to 166a are different from each other. More specifically, when the low-probability table 161a for setting 1 is referred to, the jackpot results at about 1/320, and when the low-probability table 162a for setting 2 is referred, about 1/310. The result is a jackpot, and when the low probability correctness table 163a for setting 3 is referred to, the jackpot result is about 1/300. When the low probability correctness table 164a for setting 4 is referred to, the result is about 1/290. The result is a jackpot, and when the low-probability table 165a for the setting 5 is referred to, the result is about 1/280, and when the low-probability table 166a for the setting 6 is referred to, about 1/270. The result is a jackpot. As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has a higher setting value, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the low probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

  The winning probabilities of the jackpot results set in each of the high-probability tables 161b to 166b are different from each other. More specifically, when the high accuracy determination table 161b for the setting 1 is referred to, the jackpot result is about 1/45, and when the high accuracy determination table 162b for the setting 2 is referred to, about 1/40. , A jackpot result is obtained. When the high-accuracy determination table 163b for the setting 3 is referred to, a large-hit result is obtained at about 1/35. , A jackpot result is obtained, and when the high-accuracy determination table 165b for the setting 5 is referred to, the jackpot result is about 1/25. When the high-accuracy determination table 166b for the setting 6 is referenced, about 1/20. The result is a jackpot. As a result, if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has a higher setting value, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the high probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

  That is, in the first embodiment, the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode is higher as the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is higher, while the winning probability of the jackpot result in the higher probability mode is “setting 1”. Although the configuration is the same regardless of the setting state of “Setting 6”, in the present embodiment, both the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode and the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode are pachinko. The higher the setting state of the machine 10 is, the higher the setting value is. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of the player with respect to the setting of a high setting value.

  In addition, even if the winning probability of the jackpot result of the low probability mode in the case of the “setting 6” which is the highest setting state, the winning probability of the jackpot result of the high probability mode in the case of the “setting 1” which is the lowest setting state. It is set lower than the probability. This makes it possible to prevent the player's advantage when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1” from becoming extremely low, and to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 to “setting 1”. In the case of "6", it is possible to prevent the advantage of the player from becoming extremely high.

  On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, only one type of distribution table 64h is provided so as to be common in any of the setting states of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. This makes it possible to avoid the advantage or disadvantage caused by the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the distribution mode of the jackpot result, and to store the distribution table 64h in the main ROM 64 in advance. Can be suppressed.

  The winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode is higher when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is higher, whereas the winning state of the jackpot result in the higher probability mode is higher. The configuration may be such that the setting value is lower. In this case, in the low probability mode, the higher the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is, the more advantageous the player is, and in the high probability mode, the lower the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is, the more advantageous the player is. It becomes possible.

  The winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode is higher when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is higher, while the winning probability of the jackpot result in the lower probability mode is “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. May be constant in the setting state of "." In this case, in the high-probability mode, the higher the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is, the more advantageous the player is, and in the low-probability mode, the advantage or disadvantage caused by the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented. Become.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the handling of the management result of the game history when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  The management IC 66 is provided with a separate storage memory 171 as a memory for storing information, in addition to the memories in the first embodiment. FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the separate storage memory 171. The separate storage memory 171 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require an external power supply for storing and holding (that is, a nonvolatile storage unit), and is used for both reading and writing.

  The separate storage memory 171 includes a first storage area 172, a second storage area 173, a third storage area 174, a fourth storage area 175, and a fifth storage area 176. In the first to fifth storage areas 172 to 176, information on the management result of the game history calculated when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, more specifically, in the first embodiment. The various parameters described in (1) to (8th parameter, 11th to 18th parameter, 21st to 26th parameter, 31st parameter, 41st to 42nd parameter) are sequentially stored. In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, first, various parameters are stored in the first separate storage area 172, and thereafter, every time the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the n-th The areas to be stored are switched such that the storage areas 172 to 176 → the (n + 1) th storage areas 172 to 176. Then, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set after the various parameters are stored in the fifth separate storage area 176, the various parameters are stored again in the first separate storage area 172. At this time, the various parameters already stored in the first separate storage area 172 are deleted. As a result, the various parameters until the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed five times are stored in the separate storage memory 171, and the oldest various parameters are erased for more than five times. It is memorized by the thing.

  Various parameters stored in the first to fifth storage areas 172 to 176 can be read by the external device by connecting the external device to the reading terminal 68d. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history before the new setting of the setting state is performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, a setting update recognition process according to the present embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112, will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1801: YES), the value of the set value grasp counter of the management RAM 114 is set to “1”. It is set (step S1802). The set value grasp counter is a counter for specifying the set value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management CPU 112. For example, if the value of the set value grasp counter is "1", it means "setting 1". If the value of the set value grasp counter is “6”, it means “set 6”.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S1803). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1803, the value of the set value grasp counter of the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1804). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1803, or if the process of step S1804 is performed, based on the input state of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. It is determined whether a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1805). If a negative determination is made in step S1805, the process returns to step S1803.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, monitoring processing for repeatedly changing is executed (step S1806). Although the details of the repetitive change monitoring process will be described later, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly generated in a short period of time, a process for notifying it is executed. In a configuration in which various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171 each time a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the management result of the game history when the game is played for a predetermined period is intended. It is assumed that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time so that the pachinko machine 10 is erased. On the other hand, by executing the change monitoring process repeatedly, when such an action is performed, the corresponding notification is executed.

  After that, various calculation processes are executed (step S1807). In various arithmetic processes, the processes of steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed. Thereby, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, eleventh to eighteenth parameters, twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, thirty-first parameters, and forty-first parameters) are utilized using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. To the forty-second parameter) are calculated.

  Thereafter, the various parameters calculated in step S1807 are stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 in the area to be stored this time (step S1808). In the separate storage memory 171, a pointer information area for enabling the management CPU 112 to specify an area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 is set. The information in the pointer information area is changed so that when various parameters are stored in the storage target areas among the first to fifth storage areas 172 to 176, the storage target is changed to the next order area. Will be updated to By executing the processing in step S1808, various parameters at that time for the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the separate storage memory 171.

  Thereafter, the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" (step S1809). That is, in the present embodiment, the history memory is read not only when the history information is read by the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d but also when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. The history information of 117 is deleted.

  After that, the RTC 115 reads out the RTC information, which is year / month / day information and time information (step S1810). Then, a writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1811). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the writing target pointer information is specified. The RTC information read in step S1810 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both the information for identifying the setting value and the information of the value of the setting value grasp counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting has been performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting has been performed are included. The combination is stored as history information.

  After that, the target pointer is updated (step S1812). In the update processing, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and added by one. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If it does not exceed the maximum value, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new write target pointer information. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  Next, the repetitive change monitoring process executed in step S1806 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of game times executed since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was last set is within a reference number (specifically, 100 times) (step S1901). Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 is set by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 in which the correspondence information indicating the start of the game round is stored. The number of game times executed since the state was set last time is grasped, and it is determined whether or not the grasped number of game times is within the reference number (specifically, 100 times).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, the value of the repetition change counter provided in the separate storage memory 171 is incremented by 1 (step S1902). Since the separate storage memory 171 is a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and storing as described above, external power supply is not required for storing and storing the value of the repetition change counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetition change counter after adding 1 exceeds the notification reference value “5” (step S1903). The notification reference value corresponds to the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 provided in the separate storage memory 171. Therefore, in step S1903, the number of times the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated without intervening the execution of the game times exceeding the reference number is equal to the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. It is determined whether or not it has exceeded.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1903, display processing for repeatedly changing is executed (step S1904). In the repetitive change display process, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c correspond to the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 being repeated a number of times exceeding the notification reference value in a short period of time. Display contents of repeated changes. The display content of the repeated change is a display content displaying “E” on all of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and this display content does not occur in other situations. Further, the state in which the display contents of the repeated change are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is continued until the repeated change flag provided in the separate storage memory 171 is cleared to "0". . The repetition change flag is a flag for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the display contents of the repetition change should be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. In the case where the repetition change flag is set to "1" and the display contents of the repetition change are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the display processing in the first embodiment is performed. (FIG. 31) is not executed. After that, “1” is set to the repetition change flag of the separate storage memory 171 (step S1905).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the value of the repetition change counter in the separate storage memory 171 is cleared to "0" (step S1906). Thereafter, on condition that the repetition change flag of the separate storage memory 171 is set to “1” (step S1907: YES), the display contents of the repetition change on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are displayed. The display is terminated (step S1908), and the repetition change flag is cleared to "0" (step S1909).

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  When a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is deleted. As a result, it becomes possible to leave history information of the game executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is left in the history memory 117.

  When a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, various parameters are calculated as management results of the game history using the history information of the history memory 117 at that time. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the situation before the new setting of the setting state is performed in the pachinko machine 10. Further, even if the history information in the history memory 117 is deleted when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history based on the history information to be deleted. It becomes possible.

  When a new setting of the setting state is performed in the pachinko machine 10, various parameters are calculated using the history information of the history memory 117 at that time. 171 is stored. Thereby, even if a new setting state is set in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a situation before the setting is performed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

  Since the separate storage memory 171 is provided with the plurality of separate storage areas 172 to 176, it is possible to store various parameters corresponding to the set timings of the set state for a plurality of times. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods with reference to the timing at which the new setting of the setting state is performed. Further, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated in a situation where the game is not performed, various parameters calculated using the history information of the situation where the game is substantially performed are not used. It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in the separate storage memory 171.

  Various parameters stored in the first to fifth storage areas 172 to 176 can be read by the external device by connecting the external device to the reading terminal 68d. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history before the new setting of the setting state is performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In a configuration in which various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171 each time a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the management result of the game history when the game is played for a predetermined period is intended. It is assumed that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time so that the pachinko machine 10 is erased. On the other hand, by executing the change monitoring process repeatedly, when such an action is performed, the corresponding notification is executed. Thereby, it is possible to notify the administrator or the like that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

  The notification that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period is performed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Thus, the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time using the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c for notifying the management result of the game history. Notification can be performed.

  In a situation where it is necessary to notify that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c continue to display the display contents of the repeated change. The notification of the management result of the game history in the normal state is not performed by the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Thereby, it is possible to emphasize the notification that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

  In the case where the number of game executions performed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number and the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value. The notification corresponding thereto is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the total discharge of the game balls discharged from the game area PA after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In the case where the number is within the reference number and the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed. Further, after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a predetermined ball entry portion (for example, any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, or a predetermined Combination), if the total number of game balls discharged into the combination is within the reference number and the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification is executed. Good. In addition, when the total number of pieces of history information newly stored in the history memory 117 after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number, an event that the new setting is performed is notified. The configuration may be such that, when the number of consecutive times exceeds the reference value, the corresponding notification is executed.

  Further, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed within a monitoring reference period (for example, 600 seconds) exceeding a notification reference value, a notification corresponding thereto may be performed.

  In addition, when the number of game executions performed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number and the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value. The notification corresponding thereto is executed, but the setting value is changed in a situation where the number of times of execution of the game is less than or equal to the reference number after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. When the event continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed.

  In addition, when the number of game executions performed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number and the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value. The notification corresponding thereto is executed, but the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, and the new setting is triggered when the number of executed games is within the reference number of times. When the event in which the calculated various parameters are calculated continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed.

  In addition, when the number of game executions performed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number and the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value. Although the notification corresponding thereto is executed, a configuration in which the progress of the game is limited over a predetermined period (for example, one hour) may be additionally or alternatively.

<Fourth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the third embodiment in that the monitoring process of the repetitive change is executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the monitoring process of the repetitive change executed by the main CPU 63. The repetitive change monitoring process is executed when the set value update process (step S118) is executed in the main process (FIG. 9). That is, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the change monitoring process is repeatedly performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a change monitoring process is repeatedly executed when a set value is changed.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of game times executed since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was previously set is within a reference number (specifically, 100 times) (step S2001). The main RAM 65 is provided with a game number counter for counting the number of game times executed after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, and the main CPU 63 executes the game number newly. Every time the game counter is incremented by one. Even when the main RAM 65 is cleared (steps S105 and S117), the number-of-games counter is excluded from "0" clear targets.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, the value of the repetition change counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2002). Even when the main RAM 65 is cleared (steps S105 and S117), the repetition change counter is excluded from the target of “0” clear.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetition change counter after adding 1 exceeds the notification reference value “5” (step S2003). The notification reference value corresponds to the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 provided in the separate storage memory 171. Therefore, in step S2003, the number of times the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated without intervening the execution of the game times exceeding the reference number is equal to the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. It is determined whether or not it has exceeded.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, “1” is set to the repetition change flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2004). The repetition change flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the notification of the repetition change is to be made. Even if the main RAM 65 is cleared (steps S105 and S117), the repetition change flag is excluded from the target of "0" clearing.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2001, the value of the repetition change counter of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S2005). Thereafter, on condition that “1” is set in the repetition change flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2006: YES), the repetition change flag is cleared to “0” (step S2007).

  In the repetitive change monitoring process, when the repetition change flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2008: YES), a repetition change notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S2009). When receiving the repetition change notification command, the voice light emission control device 81 causes the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 to repeatedly report the change. The notification of the repetitive change is continued until the supply of the operating power to the sound emission control device 81 is stopped.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time based on the control by the main CPU 63. In addition, since the notification is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be set without opening the gaming machine body 12 to the outer frame 11 forward. It is possible for the administrator to recognize that the new setting has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

  In addition, in the case where the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the notification command of the repetition change is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound emission control device 81, A configuration may be adopted in which an external output corresponding thereto is performed.

  In addition, the main CPU 63 may execute the repetitive change monitoring process in the present embodiment, and the management CPU 112 may execute the repetitive change monitoring process in the third embodiment. Thereby, it is possible to strictly monitor whether or not the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

<Fifth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the setting update recognition process in the management CPU 112 is different from that of the third embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a setting update recognition process according to the present embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112.

  When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2101: YES), the value of the set value grasp counter of the management RAM 114 is set to “1”. It is set (step S2102). The set value grasp counter is a counter for specifying the set value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management CPU 112. For example, if the value of the set value grasp counter is "1", it means "setting 1". If the value of the set value grasp counter is “6”, it means “set 6”.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2103). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, the value of the set value grasp counter of the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2104). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2103, or if the process of step S2104 is performed, based on the input state of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. It is determined whether a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2105). If a negative determination is made in step S2105, the process returns to step S2103.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2105, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number or more of predetermined history information exists in the history memory 117 (step S2106). Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 is set by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 in which the correspondence information indicating the start of the game round is stored. The number of game times executed since the state was set last time is grasped, and it is further determined whether or not the grasped number of game times exceeds a reference number (specifically, 100 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The number of the history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the game balls have been discharged from the game area PA is a reference number (specifically, 1000). Or not in step S2106. Correspondence information indicating that a game ball has entered a predetermined ball entry portion (for example, any one or a predetermined combination of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34). May be determined in step S2106 as to whether or not the number of history information storage areas 125 in which is stored exceeds the reference number (specifically, 1000). Further, the configuration may be such that it is determined in step S2106 whether or not the total number of history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the reference number (specifically, 1000).

  In the case where the number of game executions performed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number and the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value. The notification corresponding thereto is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the total discharge of the game balls discharged from the game area PA after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In the case where the number is within the reference number and the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed. Further, after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a predetermined ball entry portion (for example, any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, or a predetermined Combination), if the total number of game balls discharged into the combination is within the reference number and the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification is executed. Good. In addition, when the total number of pieces of history information newly stored in the history memory 117 after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number, an event that the new setting is performed is notified. The configuration may be such that, when the number of consecutive times exceeds the reference value, the corresponding notification is executed.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2107). In various arithmetic processes, the processes of steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed. Thereby, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, eleventh to eighteenth parameters, twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, thirty-first parameters, and forty-first parameters) are utilized using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. To the forty-second parameter) are calculated.

  After that, the various parameters calculated in step S2107 are stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 in the area to be stored this time (step S2108). In the separate storage memory 171, a pointer information area for enabling the management CPU 112 to specify an area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 is set. The information in the pointer information area is changed so that when various parameters are stored in the storage target areas among the first to fifth storage areas 172 to 176, the storage target is changed to the next order area. Will be updated to By executing the processing in step S2108, various parameters at that time are stored in the separate storage area 171 for the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 this time.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2106, or if the process in step S2108 is performed, the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" (step S2109). That is, in the present embodiment, the history memory is read not only when the history information is read by the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d but also when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. The history information of 117 is deleted.

  Thereafter, the RTC 115 reads out the RTC information, which is year / month / day information and time information (step S2110). Then, a writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2111). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the writing target pointer information is specified. The RTC information read in step S2110 is written to the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both the information for identifying the setting value and the information of the value of the setting value grasp counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting has been performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting has been performed are included. The combination is stored as history information.

  After that, the target pointer is updated (step S2112). In the update processing, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and added by one. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If it does not exceed the maximum value, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new write target pointer information. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  According to the above configuration, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the pachinko machine 10 stores the information in the history memory 117 on condition that a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the history memory 117. Various parameters are calculated using the history information, and the various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171. As a result, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time, the information of the management result of the game history as a result of substantially playing the game is stored in the separate storage memory 171. It can be stored.

  Note that the configuration may be such that the processing in step S2109 is executed on condition that the processing in steps S2107 and S2108 is executed. That is, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is deleted on condition that a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being erased even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

<Sixth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment.

  The history memory 117 includes a total area 141, a first state area 142, a second state area 143, and a third state area 144. In each of these areas 141 to 144, first to fourteenth counters 141a to 141n, 142a to 142n, 143a to 143n, and 144a to 144n are provided. The first counters 141a to 144a in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times that the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. In the second counters 141b to 144b of the areas 141 to 144, information on the number of times that the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b has changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored. The third counters 141c to 144c of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times that the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. In the fourth counters 141d to 144d of the areas 141 to 144, information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored. In the fifth counters 141e to 144e of the areas 141 to 144, information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored. In the sixth counters 141f to 144f of the areas 141 to 144, information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f has changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored. In the seventh counters 141g to 144g of the areas 141 to 144, information on the number of times that the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored. The eighth counters 141h to 144h of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times that the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The ninth counters 141i to 144i of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times that the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the tenth counters 141j to 144j of the areas 141 to 144. The eleventh counters 141k to 144k of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times that the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Information on the number of times that the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l has changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the twelfth counters 141l to 144l of the areas 141 to 144. The thirteenth counters 141m to 144m of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times that the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourteenth counters 141n to 144n of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times that the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n has changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a history setting process according to this embodiment, which is executed by the management-side CPU 112.

  First, the number of buffers to be checked in the management CPU 112 among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is set in the check target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2201). Specifically, the number of corresponding areas in the first to fourteenth corresponding areas 123a to 123n in the corresponding memory 116 in which information other than the information indicating the blank is stored is specified. Set the number of pieces of information in the check target counter. In this pachinko machine 10, since information other than the information indicating blank is stored in the first to eleventh correspondence areas 123a to 123k, "11" is set to the check target counter in step S2201.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the buffers 122a to 122n corresponding to the current check target counters are buffers to which the state information signal is input (step S2202). Specifically, in the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, information indicating the open / close execution mode, information indicating the high frequency support mode, and It is determined whether any of the information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, a state information setting process is executed (step S2203). In the setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether the operation is in the open / close execution mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information of the first state indicating that the operation is in the open / close execution mode is stored on the management side. The information is stored in the RAM 114, and when the output state of the eighth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the first state is deleted from the management-side RAM 114. When the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the high-frequency support mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information of the second state indicating the high-frequency support mode is stored in the management RAM 114. When the output state of the ninth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the second state is deleted from the management-side RAM 114. When the output state of the tenth signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the third state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is being opened. Is stored in the management side RAM 114, and when the output state of the tenth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the third state is deleted from the management side RAM 114.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2202 or if the process in step S2203 is performed, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is , From "0" to "1", it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level ( Step S2204). If the current value of the check target counter is a value corresponding to the eighth buffer 122h and the numerical information stored in the eighth buffer 122h is changed from “0” to “1”, the process proceeds to step S2203. The information of the first state is stored in the management-side RAM 114, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204. If the numerical information stored in the ninth buffer 122i is changed from “0” to “1” in a situation where the current value of the check target counter is a value corresponding to the ninth buffer 122i, the process proceeds to step S2203. Thus, the information of the second state is stored in the management-side RAM 114, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204. If the current value of the check target counter is a value corresponding to the tenth buffer 122j and the numerical information stored in the tenth buffer 122j is changed from “0” to “1”, the process proceeds to step S2203. The third state information is stored in the management side RAM 114, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the corresponding sum counter is added (step S2205). In the addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 141a to 141n in the total area 141 of the history memory 117 is incremented by one. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "11", the total eleventh counter 141k is to be added. If the value of the check target counter is "5", the total fifth counter 141e is to be added. If the value of the check target counter is “1”, the first counter for total 141 a is to be added.

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the first state, that is, whether or not the open / close execution mode is being performed (step S2206). If the current state is the first state (step S2206: YES), the corresponding counter for the first state is added (step S2207). In the addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 142a to 142n in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117 is added by one. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the eleventh counter 142k for the first state is to be added, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 142e for the first state is If the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 142a for the first state is to be added.

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the state is the second state, that is, whether or not the high frequency support mode is being performed (step S2208). If the current state is the second state (step S2208: YES), the corresponding second state counter is added (step S2209). In the addition processing, the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 143a to 143n for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117 is incremented by one. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "11", the eleventh counter 143k for the second state is to be added, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 143e for the second state is If the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 143a for the second state is to be added.

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information in the management-side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the state is the third state, that is, whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened (step S2210). If the state is the third state (step S2210: YES), a corresponding third state counter is added (step S2211). In the addition processing, the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 144a to 144n for the third state in the third state area 144 of the history memory 117 is incremented by one. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the eleventh counter 144k for the third state is to be added, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 144e for the third state is If the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 144a for the third state is to be added.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2204, if a negative determination is made in step S2210, or if the process of step S2211 is performed, the value of the check target counter of the management-side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2212). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the subtraction of 1 is “0” (step S2213). If the value of the check target counter is 1 or more (step S2213: NO), the processing from step S2202 is executed for the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

  By executing the history setting processing as described above, the number of times the game ball enters the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, and the opening / closing execution The number of occurrences of the mode, the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode, and the number of occurrences of the game times are not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but are stored as number information. As a result, the required storage capacity of the history memory 117 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which each piece of history information is individually stored.

  With the configuration in which the number information is stored instead of the history information, it is not necessary to execute the process of deriving the number information from the history information when calculating various parameters. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

  Next, a setting update recognition process according to the present embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112, will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2301: YES), the value of the set value grasp counter of the management RAM 114 is set to “1”. It is set (step S2302). The set value grasp counter is a counter for specifying the set value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management CPU 112. For example, if the value of the set value grasp counter is "1", it means "setting 1". If the value of the set value grasp counter is “6”, it means “set 6”.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2303). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, the value of the set value grasp counter of the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2304). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2303, or if the process in step S2304 is performed, based on the input state of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. It is determined whether a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2305). If a negative determination is made in step S2305, the process returns to step S2303.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, the eleventh counter 141k for counting the number of game times executed in the total area 141 of the history memory 117, and the opening and closing of the total area 141 in the history memory 117 The eighth counter 141h for counting the number of occurrences of the mode and the ninth counter 141i for the total counting the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode in the total area 141 in the history memory 117 are respectively shown. “0” is cleared (step S2306 to step S2308). As a result, the information on the number of times the game has been executed, the number of times the open / close execution mode has occurred, and the number of times the high frequency support mode has occurred is cleared to “0” when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Is done. Accordingly, the 31st parameter indicating the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit game, the 41st parameter indicating the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode per unit game, and the high frequency support mode for the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode The calculation result of the forty-second parameter indicating the ratio of the number of occurrences corresponds to the game content after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In the configuration in which the winning probability of the jackpot result is changed when the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the calculation result of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter is changed to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 as described above. , The calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are appropriate based on the current setting value by making the setting correspond to the game content after the new setting is performed. It is possible to determine whether or not.

  On the other hand, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the counters other than the eighth counter 141h, the ninth counter 141i, and the eleventh counter 141k in the history memory 117 are “ "0" is not cleared. As a result, the management of the number or frequency of game balls entering each history target ball entry unit is performed based on the long-term game history without being affected by the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It becomes possible.

  According to the above configuration, the number of times the game ball enters the out port 24a, the general prize port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34, the number of times of opening / closing execution mode, high frequency support The number of mode occurrences and the number of game occurrences are not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but are stored as frequency information. As a result, the required storage capacity of the history memory 117 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which each piece of history information is individually stored.

  Further, since the configuration is stored as the frequency information instead of the history information, it is not necessary to execute the process of deriving the frequency information from the history information when calculating various parameters. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

  Information on the number of times the game has been executed, the number of times the open / close execution mode has occurred, and the number of times the high frequency support mode has occurred is cleared to “0” when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Accordingly, the 31st parameter indicating the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit game, the 41st parameter indicating the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode per unit game, and the high frequency support mode for the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode The calculation result of the forty-second parameter indicating the ratio of the number of occurrences corresponds to the game content after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In the configuration in which the winning probability of the jackpot result is changed when the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the calculation result of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter is changed to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 as described above. , The calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are appropriate based on the current setting value by making the setting correspond to the game content after the new setting is performed. It is possible to determine whether or not.

  On the other hand, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the counters other than the eighth counter 141h, the ninth counter 141i, and the eleventh counter 141k in the history memory 117 are “ "0" is not cleared. As a result, the management of the number or frequency of game balls entering each history target ball entry unit is performed based on the long-term game history without being affected by the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It becomes possible.

  Note that the configuration of the history memory 117 as in the present embodiment may be applied to the above-described first to fifth embodiments and the embodiments described after this embodiment. For example, when applied to the first embodiment, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the information in the history memory 117 is maintained as it is. Further, when applied to the third embodiment, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the entire history memory 117 is cleared to “0”.

  In addition, when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the processing of steps S2306 to S2308 may be executed in the setting update recognition processing (FIG. 41). Accordingly, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is made, if the setting value is not changed before and after that, information on the number of times of execution of the game, information on the number of times of opening and closing execution mode, and high frequency support The information on the number of occurrences of the mode is not cleared to “0”, and when the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, information on the number of executions of the game, information on the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode, and the high frequency support mode Can be cleared to "0".

  In addition, before the processing of steps S2306 to S2308 is performed in the setting update recognition processing (FIG. 41), various parameters are calculated using the respective counters 141 to 144 of the history memory 117, and the calculated values are calculated. Various parameters may be stored in the calculation result memory 131.

<Seventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram for describing the configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment.

  As the history memory 117, history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to “setting 1” to “setting 6” which are the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 are provided. Specifically, a history memory 181 for setting 1 is provided corresponding to “setting 1”, and a history memory 182 for setting 2 is provided corresponding to “setting 2”. A history memory 183 for setting 3 is provided corresponding to “setting 3”, and a history memory 184 for setting 4 is provided corresponding to “setting 4”. A history memory 185 for setting 5 is provided, and a history memory 186 for setting 6 is provided corresponding to “setting 6”.

  Each of the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6 is provided with a combination of the history area 124 and the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 in the first embodiment. As a result, it is possible to store the history information in correspondence with each of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. In this case, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the setting values for which the new setting is performed are to be stored as history information. In addition, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history information can be stored for each set value without erasing the history information. Further, since various parameters are calculated using the history information corresponding to the currently set state of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters corresponding to each set value.

  The history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6 are respectively stored in the total area 141, the first state area 142, the second state area 143, and the third state area 144 in the sixth embodiment. May be set.

  Next, a setting update recognition process according to the present embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2401: YES), the value of the set value grasp counter provided in the calculation result memory 131 Is set to “1” (step S2402). The set value grasp counter is a counter for specifying the set value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management CPU 112. For example, if the value of the set value grasp counter is "1", it means "setting 1". If the value of the set value grasp counter is “6”, it means “set 6”. Further, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped because the set value grasp counter is provided in the operation result memory 131 which is a memory that does not require external power supply for storage and storage. Also, the value stored in the set value grasp counter is stored and held.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2403). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, the value of the set value grasp counter of the calculation result memory 131 is incremented by 1 (step S2404). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2403, or if the process in step S2404 is performed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. It is determined whether a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2405). If a negative determination is made in step S2405, the process returns to step S2403.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2405, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the values of the set value grasp counters of the calculation result memory 131 are set as storage targets of history information and reference targets when calculating various parameters ( Step S2406). More specifically, if the value of the set value grasp counter is “1”, it means that the setting has been set to “setting 1”. Set as a reference target at the time of calculation. If the value of the set value grasp counter is “2”, it means that the value has been set to “setting 2”. Therefore, the history memory 182 for setting 2 is used to store the history information storage target and various parameters. Set as a reference target. Further, if the value of the set value grasp counter is “3”, it means that it has been set to “setting 3”. Therefore, the history memory 183 for setting 3 is used to store the history information storage target and various parameters. Set as a reference target. If the value of the set value grasp counter is "4", it means that the value has been set to "Setting 4". Set as a reference target. If the value of the set value grasp counter is "5", it means that the value has been set to "setting 5". Set as a reference target. If the value of the set value grasp counter is "6", which means that the value has been set to "setting 6", the history memory 186 for setting 6 is used to store the history information storage target and various parameters. Set as a reference target.

  After that, the RTC 115 reads out the RTC information, which is year / month / day information and time information (step S2407). Then, a writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2408). In the writing process, the history memories 181 to 186 set as the storage targets of the history information in step S2406 are selected from the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6. Then, by referring to the pointer area 126 in the history memories 181 to 186 to be stored, the pointer information of the history area 124 which is the current write target is specified, and the pointer information becomes the write target. The RTC information read in step S2407 is written to the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information that is present. In addition, information for identifying a set value is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the combination of the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set and the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting has been performed is stored as the history information.

  After that, the target pointer is updated (step S2409). In the updating process, the history memories 181 to 186 set as the storage targets of the history information in step S2406 are selected from the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6, and the history memories 181 to 186 are stored. The numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 is read out and added by one. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If it does not exceed the maximum value, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new write target pointer information. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  According to the above configuration, the history memories 117 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6 are provided as the history memory 117 so as to correspond to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, respectively. As a result, it is possible to store the game history corresponding to each of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. In this case, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the setting values for which the new setting is performed are to be stored as history information. In addition, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history information can be stored for each set value without erasing the history information. Further, since various parameters are calculated using the history information corresponding to the currently set state of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters corresponding to each set value.

  The history memory 117 is not limited to the configuration in which the six memories of the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6 are provided. Area corresponding to the history memory 181 for setting, area corresponding to the history memory 182 for setting 2, area corresponding to the history memory 183 for setting 3, and corresponding to the history memory 184 for setting 4. An area, an area corresponding to the history memory 185 for setting 5, and an area corresponding to the history memory 186 for setting 6 may be set.

<Eighth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for describing the configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment.

  As the history memory 117, a first history memory 191 and a second history memory 192 are provided. Each of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is provided with a combination of the history area 124 and the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 in the first embodiment. In this case, a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where the history information is stored using one of the first history memories 191 and the second history memory 192. Is performed, the history information of one of the history memories 191 and 192 is left without being erased until a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the other history memories 191 and 192 after that. And history information can be newly stored in both of the history memories 191 and 192 until a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the other history memories 191 and 192. Become.

  Next, a setting update recognition process according to the present embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2501: YES), the value of the set value grasp counter provided in the management RAM 114 is set to “ 1 "(step S2502). The set value grasp counter is a counter for specifying the set value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management CPU 112. For example, if the value of the set value grasp counter is "1", it means "setting 1". If the value of the set value grasp counter is “6”, it means “set 6”.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2503). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, the value of the set value grasp counter of the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2504). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one step.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2503, or if the process in step S2504 is performed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. It is determined whether a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2505). If a negative determination is made in step S2505, the process returns to step S2503.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2505, “1” is set to the setting change occurrence flag provided in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2506). The setting change occurrence flag has been set as the storage target of the history information in the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Not only the history memories 191 and 192 but also the other history memories 191 and 192 are flags for the management-side CPU 112 to specify whether or not the situation is a history information storage target. Further, since a setting change occurrence flag is provided in the operation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require external power supply for storage retention, even if the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped, a setting change occurs. The value stored in the flag is stored and held.

  After that, the RTC 115 reads the RTC information, which is year / month / day information and time information (step S2507). Then, a writing process to the history memories 191 and 192 is executed (step S2508). In the writing process, first, by referring to the pointer area 126 of the first history memory 191, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified, and the pointer information that is the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S2507 is written to the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to. Further, both the information for identifying the setting value and the information of the value of the setting value grasp counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting is performed are included. The combination is stored in the first history memory 191 as history information. In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the second history memory 192, and the pointer that is the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S2507 is written to the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the information. Further, both the information for identifying the setting value and the information of the value of the setting value grasp counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting has been performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting has been performed are included. The combination is stored in the second history memory 192 as history information.

  Thereafter, an update process of each target pointer is executed (step S2509). In the updating process, first, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the first history memory 191 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If it does not exceed the maximum value, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new write target pointer information. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information. In the updating process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the second history memory 192 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If it does not exceed the maximum value, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new write target pointer information. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  Next, a history setting process according to the present embodiment executed by the management-side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  If “1” is not set in the setting change occurrence flag of the operation result memory 131 (step S2601: NO), the storage target side of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is This means that only the history information should be stored. In this case, first, the history memories 191 and 192 which are the current storage targets are grasped (step S2602). The calculation result memory 131 is provided with a storage target flag. If the value of the storage target flag is “0”, the first history memory 191 is to be stored, and the value of the storage target flag is “1”. , The second history memory 192 is to be stored. Note that the storage target flag is provided in the operation result memory 131 which is a memory that does not require external power supply for storage retention, so that even if the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped, the storage target flag is not stored. Is stored and held.

  Thereafter, a history setting execution process is executed for the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored (step S2603). Specifically, the processes of steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed on one of the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored. As a result, the history information is stored in the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored.

  On the other hand, when the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is set to “1” (step S2601: YES), the memory is the storage target of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192. This means that the history information should be stored not only on the side but also on the other side. In this case, a history setting execution process is executed for both history memories 191 and 192 (step S2604). Specifically, first, the processing of steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting processing (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment is executed on the first history memory 191. As a result, the history information is stored in the first history memory 191. Thereafter, the processes of steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed on the second history memory 192. As a result, the history information is stored in the second history memory 192.

  When the processing of step S2603 or the processing of step S2604 is performed, it is determined whether or not the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is set to “1” (step S2605). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2605, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number or more of ball discharge histories exist in the history memories 191 and 192 to be non-stored (step S2606). Specifically, when the value of the storage target flag of the operation result memory 131 is “0”, the first history memory 191 is to be stored, and the game area PA is stored in the second history memory 192. It is determined whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, “1000”) or more of history information indicating that a game ball has been discharged from is stored. When the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is “1”, since the second history memory 192 is to be stored, the game area is stored in the first history memory 191 from the game area PA. It is determined whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, “1000”) or more of history information indicating that is discharged is stored. It should be noted that it is not determined whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, “1000”) or more of history information indicating that game balls have been ejected from the game area PA is stored. It may be configured to determine whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, “100”) or more of history information indicating is stored.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, a storage object change process is executed (step S2607). In the process of changing the storage target, the value of the storage target flag of the operation result memory 131 is set to a value different from the current value between two values, so that the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 are changed. Change the side to be stored. Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag is “0”, the storage target is changed from the first history memory 191 to the second history memory 192 by setting the storage target flag to “1”. If the value of the storage target flag is “1”, the storage target is changed from the second history memory 192 to the first history memory 191 by clearing the storage target flag to “0”. Thereby, the history memories 191 and 192 in which only the history information of the game executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored are set as storage targets. Various parameters are calculated using the history information of the newly stored history memories 191 and 192, and are executed after the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. It is possible to derive various parameters depending on the game.

  After that, a clearing process is performed on the side of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 which has been the storage target until then (step S2608). Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag is "0", the second history memory 192 is cleared to "0", and if the value of the storage target flag is "1", the first history memory 191 is cleared to "0". Clear "0". After that, the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to “0” (step S2609).

  Next, a display output process according to the present embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  If it is the calculation timing (step S2701: YES), the storage target side of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is grasped (step S2702). Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is “0”, the first history memory 191 is grasped as a storage target, and if the value of the storage target flag is “1”, the second history memory 191 is recognized. The history memory 192 is recognized as a storage target. Thereafter, steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 30) according to the first embodiment are executed using the history information stored in the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored, which is grasped in step S2702. Thus, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters, 41st to 42nd parameters) are calculated, and the calculated various parameters are calculated. The result is stored in the result memory 131 (step S2703). In this case, since the setting change occurrence flag of the operation result memory 131 is set to “1”, the history information is stored in both the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192. Even if there is, various parameters are calculated by using one of the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2701 or if the process of step S2703 is performed, a display process is performed (step S2704). The processing content of the display processing is the same as the display processing (FIG. 31) in the first embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 are provided as the history memory 117. The history information is also stored in the history memories 191 and 192 on the side that is not the storage target, while the history memories 191 and 192 that are the storage targets are directly stored. When a predetermined number or more of history information corresponding to the ejection of the game ball from the game area PA is stored in the history memories 191 and 192 on the non-storage side, the history memory is not the storage target. The history memories 191 and 192 on the side are directly stored, and the history memories 191 and 192 on the side previously stored are cleared to “0”. Thereby, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, it is possible to calculate various parameters using only the history information of the game performed at the newly set setting value. Become.

  On the other hand, according to the above configuration, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time in order to prevent the calculation of various parameters from being performed properly, the history for the history to be stored is stored. The memories 191 and 192 are maintained without being changed. As a result, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time, it is possible to appropriately derive the management result of the game history up to that time.

  The history memory 117 is not limited to the configuration in which the two memories, the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192, are provided. The first history area corresponding to the memory 191 and the second history area corresponding to the second memory 192 may be set.

  Further, a configuration in which only one history memory 117 is provided may be employed. In this case, if the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA exceeds a predetermined number after the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. The history information before the set timing may be deleted, and the history information after the timing at which the setting is performed may be stored and held without being deleted. Accordingly, at a timing when a predetermined number or more of history information is accumulated after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history before the timing at which the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is performed. Information can be erased. Further, by setting the history information corresponding to the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 to be stored in the history memory 117, the new setting of the setting state in the history memory 117 is performed. It is possible to distinguish the history information before and after the timing at which is performed.

  Further, the timing of deleting the history information is not limited to the case where the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA has become equal to or more than a predetermined number after the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Alternatively, the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed may be equal to or more than a predetermined number.

  Further, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, if the set value has not been changed before and after that, the change of the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored as described above and the change of the history information are performed. The deletion is not performed, and when the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and the set value is changed before and after that, the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored as described above are used. May be changed and the history information may be deleted.

<Ninth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management-side I / F 111, the type of the buffer whose input signal type is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 is the above-described type. This is different from the first embodiment. Further, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 to specify the type of input signal to the management CPU 112 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 according to the present embodiment.

  The same types of signals as those in the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. The second signal is input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and the fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special power detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A signal is input, a fifth buffer 122e receives a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a, and a sixth buffer 122f receives a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a. The sixth signal is input, the seventh buffer 122g receives a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out-mouth detection sensor 48a, and the sixteenth buffer 122p outputs an instruction. No. is input.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, a signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as an eighth signal, a signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as a ninth signal, A signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as a tenth signal, a signal corresponding to the start of the game is input to the eleventh buffer 122k as an eleventh signal, and a set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122k. Although the configuration is such that these signals are input to the input terminal 122o, the buffers to which these signals are input are different in the present embodiment. Specifically, a signal corresponding to the start of the game round is input to the eleventh buffer 122k as a game round signal, a set value update signal is input to the twelfth buffer 122l, and a signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is in the open / close execution mode. A signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the fourteenth buffer 122n as a signal during the high frequency support mode, and a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the fifteenth buffer 122m as the signal during the door opening. The data is input to the buffer 122o.

  The game time signal is input to the eleventh buffer 122k, the set value update signal is input to the twelfth buffer 122l, the open / close execution mode signal is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the fourteenth buffer 122n. The input of the high-frequency support mode signal, the input of the door opening signal to the fifteenth buffer 122o, and the input of the output instruction signal to the sixteenth buffer 122p are determined in the design stage of the management IC 66. Thus, without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63, the management CPU 112 can specify that the corresponding signals are input to the eleventh to sixteenth buffers 122k to 122p. On the other hand, what types of signals are input to the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j is not determined in the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are received from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. The process for specifying the type of the signal is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the recognition processing of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the recognition process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 9) as in the first embodiment.

  First, "10", which is the number of the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j for signal type recognition, is set in the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2801). After that, an output process of the identification start signal is executed (step S2802). In the output processing, the output state of each of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n Is set to the HI level, the output of the identification start signal is started. The period during which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

  Thereafter, information on the number of outputs corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the read information on the number of outputs is set in the output counter provided in the main RAM 65 ( Step S2803). The output number counter is a counter for specifying the number of times of output of the type identification signal by the main CPU 63.

  In the present embodiment, when the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j is to be recognized by the management CPU 112, the number of award balls set for the entry section corresponding to the type of signal. The type identification signal is output the same number of times as the above. The management-side CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal has been received for each of the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j of the correspondence memory 116. . That is, the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j is grasped as the number of prize balls set for the entry section corresponding to the type of signal.

  In step S2803, when the value of the recognition output counter is any of "10", "9", and "8", "10" corresponding to the number of winning balls in the general winning opening 31 is set in the output number counter. . When the value of the recognition output counter is “7”, “15” corresponding to the number of winning balls of the special power winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is “6”, “1” corresponding to the number of winning balls in the first operation port 33 is set in the output number counter. If the value of the recognition output counter is “5”, “1” corresponding to the number of winning balls in the second operation port 34 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "4", the payout of the game ball is not executed even if the game ball enters the out port 24a although it corresponds to the out port 24a. Is set to "0". When the value of the recognition output counter is any one of “3” to “1”, the corresponding ball entry portion does not exist and is blank, so “0” is set to the output number counter.

  After that, a process of outputting a start trigger signal is executed (step S2804). In the output processing, the output of the start trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to the HI level. The period during which the first signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

  Thereafter, on the condition that the value of the output number counter of the main RAM 65 is not "0" (step S2805: YES), that is, on condition that a value of 1 or more is set in the output number counter in step S2803. The process proceeds to step S2806. In step S2806, output processing of a type identification signal is performed. In the output processing, the output state of the type identification signal is started by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to the HI level. The period during which the second signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

  Thereafter, the value of the output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S2807), and it is determined whether or not the value of the output counter after the subtraction is “0” (step S2808). If the value of the output number counter is 1 or more (step S2808: NO), the process returns to step S2806.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2805, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S2808, an end trigger signal output process is executed (step S2809). In the output processing, the output of the end trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to the HI level. The period during which the third signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

  Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S2810), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the subtraction is “0” (step S2811). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S2811: NO), the process returns to step S2803 to execute processing for recognizing the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after subtracting one. I do.

  On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is “0” (step S2811: YES), the process of outputting the identification end signal is executed (step S2812). In the output processing, the output state of each of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n Is set to the HI level, the output of the identification end signal is started. The period during which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

  Next, a management process according to the present embodiment executed by the management-side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The management process is started when the supply of the operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is started as in the first embodiment.

  First, it is determined whether the reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 has been completed (step S2901). If the identification start signal has not been received, the processing of step S2901 is executed again after the processing for setting update recognition is executed in step S2902. The processing content of the setting update recognition processing is the same as that of the first embodiment.

  If the identification start signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2901: YES), the value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S2903). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2905 on condition that a start trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2904: YES). In step S2905, it is determined whether a type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63. If the type identification signal has been received (step S2905: YES), the value of the number-of-receptions counter provided in the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2906). The reception counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63 by the management CPU 112. The value of the number-of-receptions counter is cleared to "0" when an affirmative determination is made in step S2904.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2905, or if the process in step S2906 is performed, it is determined whether an end trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2907). If the end trigger signal has not been received (step S2907: NO), the process returns to step S2905, and if the end trigger signal has been received (step S2907: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S2908). In the correspondence setting process, the reception count counter is set in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the setting target counter of the management-side RAM 114 among the first to tenth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123j of the correspondence memory 116. Store the value that has been. In this case, “10” corresponding to the number of winning balls in the general winning opening 31 is set in the first correspondence area 123a, the second correspondence area 123b, and the third correspondence area 123c, and is set in the fourth correspondence area 123d. Is set to "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32, "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operation port 33 is set to the fifth correspondence area 123e, and the sixth correspondence relation is set. “1” corresponding to the number of winning balls in the second operation port 34 is set in the area 123f. Also, “0” is set in the seventh to twelfth correspondence areas 123g to 123l. After that, the value of the setting counter of the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2909).

  If a negative determination is made in step S2904, or if the process in step S2909 is performed, it is determined whether the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has ended (step S2910). If the reception of the identification end signal has not been completed (step S2910: NO), the process returns to step S2904, and if the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2904: YES), the processing after step S2905 is performed. Execute. If the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has been completed (step S2910: YES), the history setting processing in step S2911, the display output processing in step S2912, and the external output processing in step S2913 are repeatedly executed.

  FIG. 51 is a time chart showing how the information on the correspondence between the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122j is stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. 51A shows a period in which the output state of the first signal is at the HI level, FIG. 51B shows a period in which the output state of the second signal is at the HI level, and FIG. ) Shows a period during which the output state of the third signal is at the HI level, FIG. 51D shows a period during which the output state of the signal during the open / close execution mode is at the HI level, and FIG. FIG. 51 (f) shows a period during which the output state of the signal during the high frequency support mode is at the HI level. FIG. 51 (g) shows a timing at which the value of the number-of-receptions counter of the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by 1, and FIG. 51 (h) shows a timing at which the process of identifying the correspondence is performed. Management CPU 112 Correspondence relationship setting Te processing (step S2908) shows a timing of the execution of.

  When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the first signal is output at the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. 51 (a), 51 (d) and 51 (e). The output state of the open / close execution mode signal and the high frequency support mode signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Thus, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at the timing of t2, the output states of the first signal, the open / close execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW level. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of the time t2, the management-side CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2901 of the management processing (FIG. 50), and enters the identification state as shown in FIG. 51 (f).

  Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level from the timing t3 to the timing t4, as shown in FIG. As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level from the timing t5 to the timing t7, as shown in FIG. As a result, the type identification signal is output to the management-side CPU 112 once. In this case, at the timing of t6, the value of the reception counter of the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 51 (g).

  Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level from the timing t8 to the timing t10, as shown in FIG. 51 (c). As a result, an end trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t9, the management-side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. Since the value of the number-of-receptions counter is “1” at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, “1” is set as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123j to be set this time in the correspondence memory 116. Is stored.

  Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level from the timing t11 to the timing t12, as shown in FIG. As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the timing from t13 to t15, the timing from t16 to t18, the timing from t19 to t21, and the timing from t22 to t24, as shown in FIG. The output state of the signal is maintained at the HI level. As a result, the type identification signal is output to the management-side CPU 112 once. In this case, at the timing of t14, the timing of t17, the timing of t20, and the timing of t23, as shown in FIG. 51 (g), the value of the reception counter of the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by one.

  Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level from the timing of t25 to the timing of t27, as shown in FIG. 51 (c). As a result, an end trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence setting process is executed by the management-side CPU 112 at the timing of t26, as shown in FIG. Since the value of the number-of-receptions counter is “10” at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, “10” is set as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123j to be set this time in the correspondence memory 116. Is stored.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t28, as shown in FIGS. 51 (c), 51 (d) and 51 (e), the output states of the third signal, the open / close execution mode signal and the high frequency support mode signal are set to LOW. The level is changed to the HI level. Thus, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at the timing of t29, the output states of the third signal, the open / close execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW level. Thus, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the time t29, the management-side CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2910 of the management process (FIG. 50), whereby the identification state is released as shown in FIG. 51 (f).

  In the present embodiment, since the information on the number of winning balls is stored as the correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 includes the winning ball corresponding to the entry part which triggered the storage of the history information. Information on the number is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, when there are a plurality of types of ball entry portions having the same number of prize balls, the ball entry portions cannot be distinguished in the history information. Specifically, since the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 each have one winning ball, it is possible to distinguish the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the history information. Can not. Under such circumstances, the number of prize balls of the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 may be different. Thus, even in the configuration in which the history information is stored as in the present embodiment, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 can be distinguished in the history information.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, not only the set value update signal and the output instruction signal, but also information corresponding to whether or not the game round has been started, information corresponding to whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, The information corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is being performed and the information corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened are also determined by the main CPU 63 to be signal paths corresponding to these information. Can be specified by the management-side CPU 112 without receiving the correspondence information. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection results of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is the information that needs to make the management CPU 112 recognize the correspondence between the information and the signal paths 118a to 118j from the main CPU 63. Become. When the correspondence information is to be recognized by the management-side CPU 112, the same number of pulse signals as the number of prize balls corresponding to each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is transmitted from the main-side CPU 63 to the management-side CPU 112 using the second signal. Is output to This makes it possible to simplify the configuration related to the transmission of the correspondence information.

<Tenth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration for providing information on each ball entry result to the management IC 66. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a signal path for allowing the detection results of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a to be input to the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66.

  The detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. The detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. The detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. The detection result of the special power detection sensor 45a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. The detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. The detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. The detection result of the out-mouth detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

  A first branch path SL21 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a second branch path SL22 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a third branch path SL23 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fourth branch path SL24 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fifth branch path SL25 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a sixth branch path SL26 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a seventh branch path SL27 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

  With the above configuration, the detection results of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without the intervention of the processing by the main CPU 63. As a result, the main CPU 63 executes processing for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize each ball entry result of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Therefore, the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

  The branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 exist in the MPU 62. This makes it difficult to access the branch point and the branch routes SL21 to SL27 from the outside, thereby preventing an illegal act of inputting an abnormal ball entry result only to the management IC 66. .

<Other embodiments>
It is to be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following different configurations may be individually applied to the configuration of the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

  (1) The number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit game is calculated as a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode. A configuration in which the result of dividing by the total number of game balls discharged from the PA may be calculated. Further, in addition to or instead of this, a configuration in which the number of times of the open / close execution mode is divided by the total number of the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 is calculated. It may be.

  (2) As a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the high frequency support mode, the frequency of occurrence of the high frequency support mode per unit game time and the ratio of the frequency of occurrence of the high frequency support mode to the frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode are calculated. However, in addition to or instead of this, a configuration may be used in which the result of dividing the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode by the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is calculated. In addition to or instead of this, a result of dividing the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode by the total number of the number of balls entering the first operation port 33 and the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 is calculated. It may be configured.

  (3) As a game result that triggers the opening / closing execution mode, not only the big hit result but also a small hit result may be provided. When the small hitting result is obtained, the open / close execution mode is generated, but the win / fail lottery mode and the support mode are not changed before and after the open / close execution mode. In addition, in the opening / closing execution mode in which the small hit results, the low frequency winning mode may be adopted. In this case, when a big hit result occurs, history information corresponding to the occurrence of the big hit result is stored in the history memory 117, and when a small hit result occurs, the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the small hit result is stored in the history. May be stored in the memory 117 for use. In this configuration, a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the big hit result and a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the small hit result may be calculated by using the history information stored in the history memory 117.

  (4) Regardless of the type of the jackpot result, the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is stored in the history memory 117 instead of the history information corresponding to the type of the jackpot result. May be stored in the history memory 117. In this case, a configuration may be employed in which a parameter indicating the occurrence frequency is calculated for each type of the jackpot result.

  (5) Various parameters (the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, and the fourteenth to forty-second parameters) are calculated periodically. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to calculate various parameters when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA reaches the number of calculation triggers (for example, 10,000). Various parameters may be calculated when the supply of the operating power is stopped, and various parameters may be calculated when the number of game executions reaches the number of calculation triggers (for example, 1000). Good. In this case, the configuration may be such that the history memory 117 is cleared to “0” at the timing when various parameters are calculated.

  (6) Every time the calculation timing of various parameters is reached, all of the first to eighth parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter, and the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated. The configuration is not limited to this, but only one part of the above-mentioned various parameters is to be calculated at one calculation timing, and the parameter group to be calculated is sequentially changed each time the calculation timing is reached. It may be configured. For example, the first to eighth parameters are calculated at one calculation timing, the 11th to 18th parameters are calculated at the next calculation timing, the 21st to 26th parameters are calculated at the next calculation timing, and the next calculation is performed. At the timing, the 31st parameter and the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated, and thereafter, the change of the calculation target in the above order may be repeated every time the calculation timing comes. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating parameters when one calculation timing comes.

  (7) The configuration may be such that the calculation of various parameters using the history information of the history memory 117 is executed on condition that the game is being played. For example, the configuration may be such that calculation of various parameters is executed on condition that game balls are supplied to the game area PA. This makes it possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters from being uselessly repeated even when the game is not performed.

  (8) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the management IC 66 is provided separately from the main CPU 63, and the function of the management IC 66 may be performed by the main CPU 63. In this case, the correspondence information is stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. In addition, a history memory 117, a calculation result memory 131, and a separate storage memory 171 may be provided separately from the main RAM 65. In the main RAM 65, the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the The function of the storage memory 171 may be performed. In a configuration in which the functions of the history memory 117, the operation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 are performed in the main RAM 65, when the main RAM 65 is cleared (step S <b> 105 and step S <b> 117), the history Some or all of the areas corresponding to the memory 117, the operation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 may be cleared to "0", and the history memory 117, the operation result memory 131, and the separate storage The area corresponding to each of the memory 171 may be excluded from the target of “0” clear, and may be cleared to “0” when the corresponding clear condition in each of the above embodiments is satisfied. In the main RAM 65, an area corresponding to each of the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 may be configured to have different manual operation contents for executing the clearing process between the other areas. Good. Further, the function of the management IC 66 may be performed by the sound emission control device 81.

  (9) When a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history information in the history memory 117 is stored without being erased, while various types of information stored in the operation result memory 131 are stored. The configuration may be such that the parameters are deleted. Thus, after a new setting of the setting state is performed, it is possible to prevent notification of various parameters calculated before the setting is performed.

  (10) In the third to fifth embodiments, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed (that is, even if the setting value updating process is executed by the main CPU 63), If the set value is not changed before and after the setting, the clearing process of the history memory 117 may not be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being erased even though the set value has not been changed.

  In the present configuration, the area for storing the set values in the main RAM 65 is excluded from the target of “0” clear even if all clear processing (step S117) is executed, so that the set value update processing ( The main CPU 63 can specify whether or not the set value has been changed before and after step S118). In this case, when the main CPU 63 specifies that the set value has not been changed, a signal is output to the management CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is not executed by the management CPU 112, and the main CPU 63 When it is specified that the setting value has been changed in step (1), a signal may be output to the management-side CPU 112 so that the management-side CPU 112 executes the setting update recognition process.

  Further, when a signal indicating that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been performed is received from the main CPU 63, the management CPU 112 refers to the history information stored in the history memory 117. It may be configured to specify whether or not the set value has been changed. In this case, when the management CPU 112 specifies that the set value has not been changed, the clear processing of the history memory 117 is not executed, and the management CPU 112 specifies that the set value has been changed. In this case, it is possible to execute the clearing process of the history memory 117.

  (11) In the third to fifth embodiments, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed (that is, even if the main CPU 63 executes the setting value update processing), If the set value is not changed before and after the setting, the configuration may be such that the arithmetic processing of various parameters triggered by the new setting of the setting state is not executed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent various parameters from being calculated in response to a new setting of the setting state even though the setting value has not been changed.

  In the present configuration, the area for storing the set values in the main RAM 65 is excluded from the target of “0” clear even if all clear processing (step S117) is executed, so that the set value update processing ( The main CPU 63 can specify whether or not the set value has been changed before and after step S118). In this case, when the main CPU 63 specifies that the set value has not been changed, a signal is output to the management CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is not executed by the management CPU 112, and the main CPU 63 When it is specified that the setting value has been changed in step (1), a signal may be output to the management-side CPU 112 so that the management-side CPU 112 executes the setting update recognition process.

  Further, when a signal indicating that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been performed is received from the main CPU 63, the management CPU 112 refers to the history information stored in the history memory 117. It may be configured to specify whether or not the set value has been changed. In this case, if the management CPU 112 specifies that the set value has not been changed, the calculation of various parameters triggered by the new setting of the current setting state is not executed, and the management CPU 112 sets the parameter. When it is determined that the value has been changed, it is possible to execute the calculation of various parameters triggered by the new setting of the current setting state.

  (12) In the third to fifth embodiments, if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, various parameters may be calculated in various calculation processes (step S1807) at that time. Instead, the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 at that time are stored in the storage target areas of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171, and the calculation is performed. The information stored in the result memory 131 may be cleared to “0”. In this case, since it is not necessary to calculate various parameters under the situation where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the storage of various parameters in the separate storage memory 171 can be completed early. Become.

  (13) In the third to fifth embodiments, the contents of various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 are changed by performing a predetermined display start operation. The display may be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c or another display device. The predetermined display start operation may be performed by operating a dedicated operation unit, or a predetermined dedicated operation may be performed on an operation unit for performing another operation. Thus, various parameters stored in the separate storage memory 171 can be easily checked.

  (14) Although the out port 24a, the general prize port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34 are all configured to store the history information (or the ball entry history). The configuration is such that only part of the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special winning winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is a storage target of the history information. It may be. For example, only the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, and the second operating port 34 may be configured to store history information, and only the general winning opening 31 may be configured to store history information. Good. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the entering state of the game ball in a predetermined period for the entering part for which the history information is stored.

  (15) A signal path for transmitting information corresponding to a ball entry result of a game ball in correspondence with each of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. Although the configuration is such that 118a to 118c are set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the information corresponding to the ball entry result for the same type of ball entry unit includes a plurality of the same type of ball entry unit. Even if there is a configuration in which a plurality of ball entry detection sensors exist in accordance therewith, the configuration may be such that the information is transmitted as one type of information. As a result, the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 can be reduced.

  (16) Although the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each of the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, The configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the correspondence information is stored in the management IC 66 in advance. In this case, there is no need to execute a process for causing the management IC 66 to recognize the correspondence information, so that the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

  (17) Transmission of correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each of the buffers 122a to 122o from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is performed by the main CPU 63. The configuration is performed when the supply of the operating power is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 can perform two-way communication, and the management IC 66 requests transmission of the correspondence information. The configuration may be such that when the signal is received, the correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and is used for both reading and writing. After the pachinko machine 10 is shipped, the correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Even when the supply of the operating power is stopped, the power is stored and held in the correspondence memory 116. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the frequency of transmitting the correspondence information.

  (18) Transmission of the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each of the buffers 122a to 122o from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is performed by each ball entry detection sensor. The configuration is performed using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting the information of the detection results of 42a to 48a. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. A configuration may be such that a dedicated signal path for transmission is provided. This allows the management IC 66 to know which type of information is being received from the main CPU 63 based on the types of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive that information.

  (19) Although the information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, the information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63, but the present invention is not limited to this. The information may be transmitted to the side CPU 63. For example, various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 based on the history information may be transmitted to the main CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly execute the notification control of the notifying means so that the notification corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters is performed. By transmitting a command corresponding to the content of the parameter to the audio light emission control device 81, the notification corresponding to the content of the various parameters is executed using the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. It is good also as a structure which performs.

  (20) When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, various parameters are calculated by the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, and the calculated parameters are calculated. The content of various parameters may be notified using the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the like. In this case, it is possible to confirm whether or not the entering state of the game balls in the game area PA on the immediately preceding business day at the start of the operation of the game hall is normal.

  (21) When various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 are abnormal results, the game cannot be started by the pachinko machine 10 until the prohibition release operation is performed. It may be. As a configuration in which the game cannot be started, for example, a configuration in which launching of a game ball may be prohibited or a configuration in which each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a may be invalidated may be employed. Even if a prize occurs in the 33 or the second operation port 34, the winning / non-permission determination processing may not be performed. The prohibition releasing operation may be an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again while the reset button 68c is pressed, and can be operated when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. The operation of the operation means may be performed. This makes it possible to prevent the game from being played as it is in a situation where the entering state of the game ball in the game area PA is abnormal. Further, it is possible to prevent the game from being played as it is in a situation where the frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode is abnormal.

  (22) Although the history information corresponding to the detection results of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, the calculation of various parameters using the history information is performed by either the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112. May not be executed. In this case, the history information may be read by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and the operator of the reading operation may execute the calculation of various parameters using the read history information. Alternatively, the external device may be configured to execute calculation of various parameters using the read history information. In this case, the processing load on the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 can be reduced.

  (23) The management IC 66 is provided with a power supply separate from the main CPU 63, and even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 calculates various parameters using history information. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that history information or information of various parameters can be output. As a result, even when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the history information and various parameters can be read by the external device.

  (24) The configuration is such that the reading terminal 68d used for reading the program from the main ROM 64 is also used as a terminal used for reading history information or various parameters by an external device. Instead, a terminal used to read history information or various parameters by an external device may be provided separately from a reading terminal 68d for reading a program from the main ROM 64. In this case, the terminal used to read the history information or various parameters may be provided in the MPU 62 or may be provided in a position different from the MPU 62 on the main control board 61.

  (25) The configuration is not limited to a configuration in which the correspondence memory 116, the history memory 117, and the operation result memory 131 are provided as nonvolatile storage means such as a flash memory. For example, the memories 116, 117, and 131 are used. Is provided as a volatile storage unit that requires power supply for storing and holding information, and backup power is supplied to the memory, whereby supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. Even so, the information may be stored and held. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a dedicated backup power device is provided for the memory, and a configuration is such that backup power is supplied to the memory from a power supply / emission control device 78 that supplies backup power to the main RAM 65. Is also good.

  (26) The management IC 66 is not limited to the configuration in which the management-side CPU 112 is provided as a general-purpose CPU, and the storage process of the history information and the calculation process of various parameters are executed based on the programs and data stored in the management-side ROM 113. Alternatively, a configuration in which a hardware circuit designed to have these functions is formed in the management IC 66 may be employed. Specifically, in the case of the first embodiment, for example, in the case where the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42 a to 48 a from the main CPU 63. The correspondence information corresponding to the buffer receiving the signal is stored in the history memory 117 from the correspondence memory 116, and the information of the RTC 115 at that time is stored in the history memory 117. I do. In the case of the sixth embodiment, for example, when the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a has detected a game ball from the main CPU 63, the hardware circuit receives the signal. The value of the counter corresponding to the buffer is incremented by one. Further, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters using the history information at that time when a calculation trigger occurs in the first embodiment or the like. Further, when an external output trigger to the reading terminal 68d occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters as operation results and history information.

  (27) The main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, may be provided as separate boards, or may be provided as separate control devices.

  (28) While the number of game balls entering the out port 24a is counted, the number of the game balls, such as the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, is counted. History information including RTC information may be stored with respect to the entry of the ball into the bonus opportunity entry section which is the trigger of the prize ball payout or the winning / failing determination process. With this, it is possible to calculate the ball entry frequency of game balls to each privilege opportunity ball unit with respect to the total number of game balls discharged, while making it possible to extract the history of game balls entering the bonus opportunity ball unit. Become.

  (29) The predetermined event that triggers the storage of the history information may include a configuration other than that in the above embodiments. For example, at least one of the timing when the lower plate 56a becomes full, the timing when the full state is started, and the timing when the full state is released may be stored as history information. At least one of the timing of the absence of the ball, the timing of the start of the absence of the ball, and the timing of the release of the absence of the ball may be stored as history information, and the dispensing device 76 is in an abnormal state. At least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is started and the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is released may be stored as history information. In this case, it is possible to grasp the occurrence frequency of these events.

  (30) In the first embodiment, the configuration is such that the sixteenth buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management-side I / F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal in the design stage of the management IC 66 in advance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fact that the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 by transmitting the type identification command from the main CPU 63. It may be. In the first embodiment, the configuration is such that the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 in the management-side I / F 111 corresponds to the set value update signal in the design stage of the management IC 66 in advance. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The fact that the fifteenth buffer 122o corresponds to the set value update signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 by transmitting the type identification command from the main CPU 63. It may be configured. In this case, it is not necessary to previously set the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p in the management IC 66 in advance.

  (31) The management IC 66 may transmit a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when it is operating normally. In this case, the main CPU 63 can monitor whether the management IC 66 is operating normally.

  (32) The display device for displaying the set value being updated in the set value update process (FIG. 10) is not limited to the third notification display device 69c, but may be the symbol display device 41. May be the display device.

  (33) The operation unit operated to update the set value in the set value update process (FIG. 10) is not limited to the update button 68b, but may be the reset button 68c. Further, positions corresponding to each of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” are set as the rotation operation positions when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion section 68a and the rotation operation is performed. The configuration may be such that a set value corresponding to the rotational operation position of the part 68a is set. Further, the setting key insertion portion 68a is configured to be capable of being further rotated than the ON position, and each time a rotating operation beyond the ON position is performed, the set value being updated is changed to the next set value. The configuration may be updated.

  (34) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 82 is controlled by the sound emission control device 81 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60, the display control is performed based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The device 82 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be adopted. May be integrated in the main control device 60, and both functions of the two control devices may be integrated in the main control device 60. The configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the audio light emission control device 81 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the audio light emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are also arbitrary.

  (35) Other types of pachinko machines, such as pachinko machines, which are different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific region of a special device, or a game ball in a specific region of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that becomes a jackpot when a right enters and a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, etc. provided with other accessories.

  In addition, a game machine that is not a ball-and-ball type, for example, includes a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided in a circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols has been established on the activated line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, a bonus such as payout of medals is provided to the player. The present invention can be applied to a slot machine.

  Further, the game machine main body supported to be openable and closable on the outer frame includes a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Accordingly, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, in which the rotation of a reel is started.

  When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, for example, the result of a lottery process of a role executed when one game is started based on an operation of a start lever is recorded as history information. It may be configured to calculate the actual winning probability of each role using the history information, and when a transition to a special game state such as a bonus game occurs, it is stored as history information, and the history is stored. The information may be used to calculate the actual transition probability to the special game state, or the ratio of the number of staying games in the special game state to the total number of consumed games may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be readable by an external device, or a notification corresponding to the calculation results of the various parameters may be performed by the gaming machine itself. In addition, a configuration in which a plurality of stages of setting states exist, such as “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, and a configuration in which the winning probability in the lottery process of winning combinations may be changed according to the setting state. In this case, the configuration in each of the above embodiments may be applied to handling of history information, calculation of various parameters, and handling of repeated changes when the setting of the setting state is newly set or when the setting value is changed. .

  (36) The characteristic configurations of the first to tenth embodiments may be mutually applied in any combination. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the tenth embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configuration of the embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the fourth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the eighth embodiment may be combined. In addition, a configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the above-described first to tenth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination may be applied in any combination of the configurations in the above-described other embodiments.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses or the like.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. Setting means (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
History storage executing means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of a game corresponding to the predetermined event in the history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game )When,
Information erasing means for erasing at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage means, with at least one condition that setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means is performed (third condition) In the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1809 in the management CPU 112, in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2109 in the management CPU 112, and in the sixth embodiment, steps S2306 to S2306 of the management CPU 112 A function of executing the processing of S2308, a function of executing the processing of step S2608 in the management-side CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment),
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature A1, since a setting value to be used is set from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. When a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the event is stored in the history information storage unit. As a result, information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored and held in the gaming machine, and the management of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is preferable by using the managed information. Can be performed. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification.

  In this case, at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage unit is erased under at least one condition that the setting of the set value to be used is newly performed. This makes it possible to adjust the contents of the history storage means so that the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the situation after the new setting of the setting value to be used can be appropriately managed. .

Feature A2. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
An information acquisition unit (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the ball entry unit;
An addition determining unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the additional information;
Privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the result of the provision that the special information corresponds to the provision information in the provision determination. A function of executing the processing from S409 to step S412);
With
The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein the probability of the provision of the provision result in the provision determination varies according to the set value.

  According to the feature A2, in a so-called pachinko machine, it is possible to change the probability of the provision result in accordance with the set value. In this case, by providing the configuration of the above-described feature A1, the history storage unit is configured to appropriately manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the situation after the probability of the provision result is changed. The content can be adjusted.

  Feature A3. The information erasing unit may erase all of the history information stored in the history storage unit on at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit is performed. A gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2.

  According to the feature A3, all the history information stored in the history information storage unit is deleted when the setting of the setting value to be used is newly performed, so that the setting value of the setting value to be used is The occurrence frequency of the predetermined event can be specified based on the newly set timing.

  Feature A4. The information erasing unit, as at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit has been performed, erases part of the history information stored in the history storage unit, The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein a part of the history information stored in the history storage unit is left.

  According to the feature A4, when a setting value to be used is newly set, history information unnecessary for management of the frequency of occurrence of the subsequent predetermined event is deleted, and management of the frequency of occurrence of the subsequent predetermined event is performed. Necessary history information can be left. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event after the setting of the setting value to be used is newly performed.

Feature A5. The history information stored in the history storage means includes first history information (history indicating that the open / close execution mode has occurred, in which the occurrence probability of the predetermined event corresponding to the history information varies according to the set value. Information) and second history information (history information indicating that a game ball has been ejected from the game area PA) that does not vary according to the set value,
The information erasing unit erases the first history information stored in the history storage unit as at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit is performed, The gaming machine according to Feature A4, wherein the second history information stored in history storage means is left.

  According to the feature A5, when the setting value to be used is newly set, the first history information corresponding to the predetermined event whose occurrence probability varies according to the setting value is deleted, and the occurrence probability is changed to the setting value. The second history information corresponding to the predetermined event that does not fluctuate according to is not deleted. Accordingly, when the first history information before the setting of the setting value to be used is newly performed is taken over after the setting of the setting value is newly performed, occurrence of a predetermined event corresponding to the first history information is generated. The first history information that is not preferable in specifying the frequency can be deleted when the setting of the set value is newly performed. On the other hand, the second history information is referred to when specifying the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event corresponding to the second history information by not deleting the second history information even if a setting value to be used is newly set. Since it is possible to secure a large number of pieces of the second history information, it is possible to accurately specify the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event corresponding to the second history information.

Feature A6. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
An information acquisition unit (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the ball entry unit;
An addition determining unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the additional information;
Privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the result of the provision that the special information corresponds to the provision information in the provision determination. A function of executing the processing from S409 to step S412);
With
It is a configuration in which the probability of the assignment corresponding result in the assignment determination varies according to the set value,
The first history information includes information corresponding to the award of the privilege,
The gaming machine according to Feature A5, wherein the second history information includes information corresponding to ejection of a game ball from the game area in a predetermined manner.

  According to the feature A6, since the provision probability of the privilege changes according to the setting value, the first history information is deleted when the setting value to be used is newly set. Thus, it is possible to specify the frequency of granting the privilege under the situation of the newly set setting value. On the other hand, the frequency at which game balls are ejected from the game area does not fluctuate in accordance with the set value, so that the second history information is not deleted even if a set value to be used is newly set, It is possible to accurately specify the frequency at which game balls are discharged from the game area in a predetermined manner.

  Feature A7. The information erasing unit is configured to set at least the set value to be used by the setting unit, and to store at least a predetermined amount of the history information in the history storage unit when the history information is stored in the history storage unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, wherein a part of the gaming machine is deleted.

  According to the feature A7, when a predetermined amount of history information is not stored in the history storage unit in a predetermined amount or more, the history information is not deleted even if a new setting of a setting value to be used is performed. Thus, even if a new setting of the setting value is repeated in a situation where the game is not performed, it is possible to prevent the deletion of the history information in the history storage unit from being repeated.

  Feature A8. As at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means has been performed, a result of a game in a predetermined period is obtained by using the history information stored in the history storage means. Information deriving means for deriving the corresponding aspect information (the function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the management-side CPU 112 in the third embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment) The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, comprising:

  According to the feature A8, at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage unit under the condition that a new setting of a setting value to be used is performed is provided as at least one condition having the configuration of the above-described feature A1. In the configuration to be deleted, a mode corresponding to a result of a game in a predetermined period using history information stored in the history storage unit when a new setting of a setting value to be used is performed as an opportunity Information is derived. As a result, even if at least a part of the history information is deleted when the set value is changed, the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the situation before the set value is changed is grasped. It is possible to do.

  Feature A9. The gaming machine according to Feature A8, further comprising aspect information storage means (separate storage memory 171) for storing the aspect information derived by the information derivation means.

  According to the feature A9, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is utilized by using the history information stored in the history storage unit when the setting value to be used is newly set. Is derived, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage means. Thereby, even if the set value is changed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a situation before the set value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

  Feature A10. The gaming machine according to Feature A9, wherein the aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of the aspect information.

  According to the feature A10, since a plurality of aspect information can be stored in the aspect information storage unit, the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods is grasped based on the timing at which a new setting of the setting value is performed. It is possible to do. Further, even if a new setting of the setting value is repeated in a situation where the game is not performed, the aspect information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is substantially played is stored in the aspect information storage unit. It is possible to increase the possibility that the information remains.

Feature A11. The aspect information storage means can store a predetermined number of the aspect information,
This gaming machine executes a special process when the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit occurs under the predetermined condition more than the predetermined number (in the third embodiment, the management CPU 112 The gaming machine according to feature A9 or A10, further comprising a function of executing a repetitive change monitoring process (in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing a repetitive change monitoring process in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature A11, the setting value is set in a situation where the game is not performed so that the aspect information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is substantially played is not left in the aspect information storage means. If the new setting is repeated, special processing is executed for it. Thereby, it is possible to cope with the act.

  Feature A12. The gaming machine according to any one of features A8 to A11, wherein the information deriving unit derives the mode information when a predetermined amount or more of the history information is stored in the history storage unit. .

  According to the feature A12, the mode information is derived when the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage unit in a predetermined amount or more. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the mode information from being unnecessarily derived. .

  Feature A13. The information erasing unit erases the history information from when the setting value to be used by the setting unit is set to when a predetermined amount of the history information is stored in the history storage unit in a predetermined amount or more. Without setting the set value to be used by the setting means, and before setting the set value, when the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means in a specific amount or more. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, wherein the history information stored in the history storage unit is deleted.

  According to the feature A13, until a specific amount of predetermined history information is newly stored in the history information storage unit, even if a new setting of a setting value to be used is performed, the setting value is not changed before the setting is performed. The stored history information is not deleted. Thereby, even if a new setting of the set value is performed, it is possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period.

Feature A14. The history storage unit includes a first history storage unit (first history memory 191) and a second history storage unit (second history memory 192),
The history storage execution means,
When the predetermined event occurs during a predetermined period from when the setting value to be used by the setting unit is set to when the cancellation condition is satisfied, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the first history storage unit and Means for storing in both of the second history storage means (the function of executing the processing of step S2604 in the management-side CPU 112);
Means for storing the history information corresponding to the first history storage means and the second history storage means which are set as storage targets when the predetermined event occurs during a period other than the predetermined period. (The function of executing the process of step S2603 in the management-side CPU 112);
With
The information erasing unit, when the release condition is satisfied, erases the history information stored on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit which has been set as the storage object up to then. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13.

  According to the feature A14, until a specific amount of history information is newly stored in the history information storage unit, even if a new setting of a setting value to be used is performed, the setting value is stored before the setting is performed. The history information that was being used is not deleted. Thereby, even if a new setting of the set value is performed, it is possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period. Further, it is possible to produce the effect only by appropriately changing the history storage unit for storing the history information between the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit.

  Feature A15. Using the history information stored on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is set as the storage target, derive mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information The gaming machine according to feature A14, further comprising an information deriving unit (a function of executing the process of step S2703 in the management-side CPU 112).

  According to the feature A15, even when the history information is stored in both the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit by performing the new setting of the setting value, the mode using the history information is used. Information can be appropriately derived.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A15, any one or a plurality of configurations of the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, and the features F1 to F3. May be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. Setting means (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
History storage executing means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of a game corresponding to the predetermined event in the history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game )When,
With
Before the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means is performed, the predetermined history information stored in the history storage means is set to the setting value to be used by the setting means. A gaming machine characterized by being stored and retained in the history storage means even after the game.

  According to the feature B1, since a setting value to be used is set from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. When a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the event is stored in the history information storage unit. As a result, information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored and held in the gaming machine, and the management of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is preferable by using the managed information. Can be performed. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification.

  In this case, even if the setting value to be used is newly set, the history information stored in the history storage unit is stored and not erased. As a result, even if the setting value to be used is set, the history information up to that time can be continuously stored in the history storage unit, and accumulated in the history storage unit over a long period of time. It is possible to specify the management result of the game history using the history information obtained.

  Feature B2. When the setting unit sets the setting value to be used, the history storage executing unit stores the history information corresponding to the setting value in the history storing unit. The game according to Feature B1, wherein the management-side CPU 112 has a function of executing the processing of Step S1307 in the management-side CPU 112, and the management-side CPU 112 has a function of executing the processing of Step S2408 in the management-side CPU 112). Machine.

  According to the feature B2, the setting of the setting value to be used is newly performed in the configuration in which the history information is stored and held without being erased even if the setting of the setting value to be used is newly set. History information corresponding to this is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to distinguish between the history information before the setting of the setting value to be used is newly performed and the history information after the setting is performed.

  Feature B3. The setting execution storage means stores the information corresponding to the set value in the history storage means as the history information when the setting value of the setting object to be used is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to Feature B2, wherein:

  According to the feature B3, it is possible to specify the content of the set value set in the past by referring to the history information.

  Feature B4. The history storage means includes a plurality of correspondence history storage means (history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6) corresponding to a plurality of types of set values which can be set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3.

  According to the feature B4, since the correspondence history storage means is provided corresponding to each of the set values, it is possible to store the history information separately for each set value.

  Feature B5. When the setting value to be used by the setting unit is set by the setting unit, the corresponding history storage unit corresponding to the set value to which the setting is performed is set as a storage target of the history information thereafter (management side The gaming machine according to Feature B4, further including a function of executing the process of Step S2406 in the CPU 112).

  According to the feature B5, when a setting value to be used is newly set, the corresponding history storage means corresponding to the setting value is set as a storage target of subsequent history information. It is possible to store the history information separately.

  Feature B6. An information deriving unit that derives mode information corresponding to a result of a game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the corresponding history storage unit to be stored (display output processing in the management CPU 112) The gaming machine according to feature B5, further comprising:

  According to the feature B6, in the configuration in which the history information is stored separately for each set value, it is possible to derive the mode information corresponding to the currently set set value.

Feature B7. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
An information acquisition unit (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the ball entry unit;
An addition determining unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the additional information;
Privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the result of the provision that the special information corresponds to the provision information in the provision determination. A function of executing the processing from S409 to step S412);
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, wherein a probability of the provision of the provision result in the provision determination varies according to the set value.

  According to the feature B7, in a so-called pachinko machine, it is possible to change the probability of the result of the provision of the response in accordance with the set value.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B7, any one or more of the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, and the features F1 to F3. May be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. Setting means (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
History storage executing means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of a game corresponding to the predetermined event in the history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game )When,
After setting the setting value to be used by the setting unit, the setting unit does not delete the history information until at least a predetermined amount of the history information is stored in the history storage unit. (The function of executing the processing of step S2506 and steps S2605 to S2609 in the management-side CPU 112);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature C1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. That you expect. When a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the event is stored in the history information storage unit. As a result, information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored and held in the gaming machine, and the management of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is preferable by using the managed information. Can be performed. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification.

  In this case, until a specific amount of predetermined history information is newly stored in the history information storage unit, even if a new setting of a setting value to be used is performed, the setting value is stored before the setting is performed. The history information that was being used is not deleted. Thereby, even if a new setting of the set value is performed, it is possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period.

  Feature C2. The post-setting correspondence unit is configured to set the set value when a predetermined amount of the history information is stored in the history storage unit after the setting of the set value to be used by the setting unit is performed in a predetermined amount or more. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the history information stored in the history storage unit is erased before the execution is performed.

  According to the feature C2, when a specific amount of history information that allows the management result of the game history to be specified for a predetermined period after the setting value is newly set is stored in the history storage unit. The history information stored in the history information storage unit before the new setting of the setting value is performed is deleted. This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary history information from being continuously stored in the history information storage unit.

Feature C3. The history storage unit includes a first history storage unit (first history memory 191) and a second history storage unit (second history memory 192),
The history storage execution means,
When the predetermined event has occurred, means for storing the history information corresponding to the one of the first history storage means and the second history storage means which is set as a storage object (step S2603 in the management CPU 112). Function to execute the process),
After the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit is performed, the predetermined history information is stored on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is not set as the storage target. Means for storing the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means until the specified amount of information is stored until the specified amount is stored. Function for executing the process of step S2604 in
With
The post-setting response means includes:
After the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit is performed, the predetermined history information is stored on a side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is not set as the storage target. Means for changing the storage object between the first history storage means and the second history storage means when the specified amount or more is stored (a function of executing the process of step S2607 in the management-side CPU 112);
After the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit is performed, the predetermined history information is stored on a side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is not set as the storage target. When the specified amount or more is stored, the history information on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit which has been set as the storage object up to that point is deleted (step S2608 in the management CPU 112). Function to execute the process),
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, comprising:

  According to the feature C3, until a specific amount of history information is newly stored in the history information storage unit, even if a new setting of a setting value to be used is performed, the setting information is stored before the setting is performed. The history information that was being used is not deleted. Thereby, even if a new setting of the set value is performed, it is possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period. Further, it is possible to produce the effect only by appropriately changing the history storage unit for storing the history information between the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit.

  Feature C4. Using the history information stored on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is set as the storage target, derive mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information The gaming machine according to feature C3, further comprising an information deriving unit (a function of executing the process of step S2703 in the management-side CPU 112).

  According to the feature C4, even when the history information is stored in both the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit by performing the new setting of the setting value, the mode using the history information is used. Information can be appropriately derived.

Feature C5. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
An information acquisition unit (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the ball entry unit;
An addition determining unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the additional information;
Privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the result of the provision that the special information corresponds to the provision information in the provision determination. A function of executing the processing from S409 to step S412);
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein the probability of the provision of the provision result in the provision determination varies according to the set value.

  According to the feature C5, in a so-called pachinko machine, it is possible to change the probability of the provision result in accordance with the set value.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C5, any one or a plurality of configurations among the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, and the features F1 to F3. May be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Setting means (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
Special execution means for executing a special process on the condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means has been executed in a special situation (at least one condition). A function of executing a process, a function of executing a monitoring process of a repeated change in the main CPU 63 in the fourth embodiment, and a function of making a negative determination in step S2106 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature D1, since a setting value to be used is set from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. In this case, the special processing is executed on the condition that the new setting of the setting value to be used is executed in the special situation at least as one condition. This makes it possible to cope with a case where a new setting value is set in an unfavorable situation.

  Feature D2. The special processing unit executes the special processing under at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit has been performed a specific number of times or more in the special situation. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature D2, even if a new setting of a setting value to be used in a special situation is executed, if the number of times of execution is less than a specific number, no special processing is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the special process from being executed until the regular operator has executed a new setting of the set value less than the specified number of times in the special situation.

  Feature D3. The special execution means may include, as the special situation, a situation in which a game has not been performed since the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means is performed or a setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means. Performing the special processing on at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit has been performed in a situation in which a game equal to or more than a predetermined reference has not been performed since the game was performed. The gaming machine according to Feature D1 or D2.

  According to the feature D3, when a new setting of a set value to be used is performed in a situation where a game is not performed or a situation where a game is not substantially performed, a special process is performed. When the act is performed, it is possible to deal with it.

  Feature D4. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the special execution unit executes a notification process as the special process.

  According to the feature D4, the notification process is executed on the condition that a new setting of a setting value to be used has been executed in a special situation, as at least one condition. This makes it possible to prompt the user to deal with a case where a new setting value is set in an unfavorable situation.

Feature D5. History storage executing means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of a game corresponding to the predetermined event in the history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game )When,
As at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means has been performed, a result of a game in a predetermined period is obtained by using the history information stored in the history storage means. Information deriving means for deriving corresponding aspect information (a function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment) ,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, comprising:

  According to the feature D5, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the event occurs is stored in the history information storage unit. As a result, information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored and held in the gaming machine, and the management of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is preferable by using the managed information. Can be performed. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification.

  In this case, when the new setting of the setting value to be used is performed, using the history information stored in the history storage unit, the mode information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is used. Derived. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the situation before the setting value is changed.

  Feature D6. Deriving the aspect information by the information deriving means as the special processing, as at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means has been executed in the special situation; The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein the game machine does not perform the game.

  According to the feature D6, even when a new setting of a setting value to be used is performed, if the setting is performed in an unfavorable situation, the mode information is not derived. This makes it possible to prevent the mode information from being unnecessarily derived.

  Feature D7. The gaming machine according to Feature D5 or D6, further comprising aspect information storage means (separate storage memory 171) for storing the aspect information derived by the information derivation means.

  According to the feature D7, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage unit when the new setting of the setting value to be used is performed as an opportunity Is derived, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage means. Thereby, even if the set value is changed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a situation before the set value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

  Feature D8. The gaming machine according to Feature D7, wherein the aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of the aspect information.

  According to the feature D8, since a plurality of aspect information can be stored in the aspect information storage means, the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods is grasped based on the timing at which a new setting of the setting value is performed. It is possible to do. Further, even if a new setting of the setting value is repeated in a situation where the game is not performed, the aspect information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is substantially played is stored in the aspect information storage unit. It is possible to increase the possibility that the information remains.

Feature D9. The aspect information storage means can store a predetermined number of the aspect information,
The special execution unit executes the special process when the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit occurs more than the predetermined number in the special situation. Or the gaming machine according to D8.

  According to the feature D9, the setting value is set in a situation where the game is not performed so that the aspect information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is substantially played is not left in the aspect information storage means. If the new setting is repeated, special processing is executed for it. Thereby, it is possible to cope with the act.

Feature D10. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
An information acquisition unit (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the ball entry unit;
An addition determining unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the additional information;
Privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the result of the provision that the special information corresponds to the provision information in the provision determination. A function of executing the processing from S409 to step S412);
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein a probability of the provision of the provision result in the provision determination varies according to the set value.

  According to the feature D10, in a so-called pachinko machine, it is possible to change the probability of the provision result in accordance with the set value.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D10, any one or a plurality of configurations among the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, and the features F1 to F3. May be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Setting means (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
History storage executing means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of a game corresponding to the predetermined event in the history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game )When,
As at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means has been performed, a result of a game in a predetermined period is obtained by using the history information stored in the history storage means. Information deriving means for deriving corresponding aspect information (a function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment) ,
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature E1, since a setting value to be used is set from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. When a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the event is stored in the history information storage unit. As a result, information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored and held in the gaming machine, and the management of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is preferable by using the managed information. Can be performed. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification.

  In this case, when the new setting of the setting value to be used is performed, using the history information stored in the history storage unit, the mode information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is used. Derived. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the situation before the setting value is changed.

  Feature E2. The gaming machine according to Feature E1, further comprising aspect information storage means (separate storage memory 171) for storing the aspect information derived by the information derivation means.

  According to the feature E2, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage unit when the setting value to be used is newly set as an opportunity Is derived, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage means. Thereby, even if the set value is changed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a situation before the set value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

  Feature E3. The gaming machine according to Feature E2, wherein the aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of the aspect information.

  According to the feature E3, since a plurality of aspect information can be stored in the aspect information storage means, the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods is grasped based on the timing at which a new setting of a setting value is performed. It is possible to do. Further, even if a new setting of the setting value is repeated in a situation where the game is not performed, the aspect information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is substantially played is stored in the aspect information storage unit. It is possible to increase the possibility that the information remains.

Feature E4. The aspect information storage means can store a predetermined number of the aspect information,
This gaming machine is means for executing a special process when the setting of the set value to be used by the setting means has occurred more than the predetermined number under predetermined conditions (in the third embodiment, the management CPU 112 The gaming machine according to feature E2 or E3, further comprising a function of executing a repetitive change monitoring process (in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing a repetitive change monitoring process in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature E4, the setting value is set in a situation where the game is not performed so that the aspect information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is substantially played does not remain in the aspect information storage means. If the new setting is repeated, special processing is executed for it. Thereby, it is possible to cope with the act.

  Feature E5. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the information deriving unit derives the aspect information when a predetermined amount or more of the history information is stored in the history storage unit. .

  According to the feature E5, since the mode information is derived when the predetermined amount of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage unit, it is possible to prevent the mode information from being unnecessarily derived. Become.

Feature E6. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
An information acquisition unit (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the ball entry unit;
An addition determining unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the additional information;
Privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the result of the provision that the special information corresponds to the provision information in the provision determination. A function of executing the processing from S409 to step S412);
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein a probability of the provision of the provision result in the provision determination varies according to the set value.

  According to the feature E6, in a so-called pachinko machine, it is possible to change the probability of the result of the provision of the response in accordance with the set value.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E6, one or a plurality of configurations of the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, and the features F1 to F3. May be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, the feature D group, and the feature E group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko game machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device. The game is fired toward the game area in accordance with the shooting operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration having an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as dish storage sections is also known. In this case, game balls stored in the upper dish storage section are used to launch game balls. The game balls guided by the device and surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as those described above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic F group>
Feature F1. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
An information acquisition unit (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the ball entry unit;
An addition determining unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the additional information;
Privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the result of the provision that the special information corresponds to the provision information in the provision determination. A function of executing the processing from S409 to step S412);
Setting means (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
With
The assignment determining unit has a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode so that the probability of the assignment corresponding result is relatively high and low, as the mode of the assignment determination.
A gaming machine, wherein the probability of the provision of the provision result in at least the low probability mode varies according to the set value.

  According to the feature F1, it is possible to change the probability of being the provision result in at least the low probability mode according to the set value in the so-called pachinko machine. As a result, even in the case of a single gaming machine, it is possible to generate a situation in which the probability of the provision result in the low probability mode is advantageous or disadvantageous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature F2. The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the probability of the provision of the provision result in the high probability mode does not change according to the set value.

  According to the feature F2, the probability of the provision result in the low probability mode is varied according to the set value, while the probability of the provision result in the high probability mode is not varied according to the set value. By doing so, it is possible to limit the influence of the set value to the situation in the low probability mode.

Feature F3. There are multiple types of the benefits,
The gaming machine according to Feature F1 or F2, wherein the selection mode of the privilege does not change according to the set value.

  According to the feature F3, the effect of the setting value is changed by changing the probability of the provision result in the low probability mode according to the setting value, while not changing the selection mode of the privilege according to the setting value. Can be restricted to situations in the low probability mode.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F3, any one or more of the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, and the features F1 to F3. May be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature F group, the following problem can be solved.

  Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko game machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device. The game is fired toward the game area in accordance with the shooting operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration having an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as dish storage sections is also known. In this case, game balls stored in the upper dish storage section are used to launch game balls. The game balls guided by the device and surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machines as exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  Hereinafter, a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each of the features will be described.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, gaming ball firing means for firing a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path for guiding the fired game ball to a predetermined game area, A gaming machine comprising: a plurality of game components arranged in a region; and a bonus is provided to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of the game components.

  Spinning-type gaming machines such as slot machines: provided with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably displaying the plurality of pictures is started by the operation of the start operation means, and caused by the operation of the stop operation means A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of pictures is stopped after a predetermined time or a predetermined time has elapsed, and a privilege is given to the player according to the pictures after the stop.

  10 Pachinko machine, 33 First operation port, 34 Second operation port, 63 Main CPU, 112 Management CPU, 117 History memory, 171 Separate storage memory, 181 to 186 Setting 1 6, a history memory 191, a first history memory, and 192 a second history memory.

Claims (1)

Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage,
History storage executing means for storing, in a history storage means, history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event occurring when a game is executed,
Equipped with a,
The history storage unit includes a first history storage unit and a second history storage unit,
The history storage execution means,
Means for storing, on the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means, which is set as a storage object, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event,
After the setting of the set value to be used by the setting unit is performed, the predetermined history information is set on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is not set as the storage target. Means for storing the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means until the predetermined event has occurred,
With
This gaming machine is
After the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit is performed, the predetermined history information is stored on a side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is not set as the storage target. Means for changing the storage object between the first history storage means and the second history storage means when the specific amount or more is stored;
After the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit is performed, the predetermined history information is stored on a side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is not set as the storage target. A means for erasing the history information on the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means which has been set as the storage target up to the specified amount,
Gaming machine, characterized in that it comprises.

Images